JP6982308B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

When the stored contents of the RAM (Random Access Memory) are initialized when the power is turned on, the RAM clear notification start signal is sent from the main CPU (Central Processing Unit) of the main control board to each CPU of the lamp control board and the voice control board. There is a game machine that outputs.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-210807

In such a gaming machine, in order to prevent the RAM from being cleared illegally by a malicious third party, it is common to notify the RAM clear at a loud volume as in the error sound at the time of fraud detection.

On the other hand, one of the tasks that involves clearing the RAM is the setting operation of the gaming machine. The setting operation of the gaming machine is generally performed by operating a switch or the like provided on the gaming control device provided on the back side of the front frame of the gaming machine, which is not easy for an unfamiliar operator. .. In such a work environment, the RAM clear notification sound during the setting operation of the gaming machine may reduce the workability of the operator.

In one aspect, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be set and operated in a favorable working environment.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine as shown below is provided. The gaming machine has a main body, a front portion that can be opened and closed on the front side of the main body with one side as an axis, a first sound output portion provided on the axial attachment side of the front portion, and a front portion. It is provided with a second sound output unit provided on the open end side of the above, a game control means for performing game control, and an effect control means for receiving a command from the game control means to perform effect control. The game control means is an information storage means that can store and hold the game information before the power is cut off, a setting means that can set the game performance, and an initialization that initializes the game information that is held when the game performance is set. It includes a means, a display means capable of selectively displaying game performance information regarding game performance, and derivation performance information derived based on the number of acquired game media. The information storage means includes a first work area and a first stack area related to information related to game control including game performance information, and a second work area and a second stack area related to derivation performance information. When the power is turned on, the game control means excludes the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area from the determination of the validity of the game information stored and held in the information storage means, and the first work area. The information storage means is initialized when the result of the validity judgment is not valid and the condition for setting the game performance to the configurable state is not satisfied. If the condition for stopping the game progress and making it a configurable state is satisfied, the setting is made, and the first work area and the first stack area are targeted, and the second work area and the second stack are made. Initialize the information storage means that excludes the area. Performance control means, when performing the notification and the sound output for initializing the broadcast and gaming information that is settable state, is ready to be set at the second sound output unit in the open state the front portion is opened It includes a notification control means for setting a priority notification state in which either the notification of the fact or the notification related to the initialization of the game information is prioritized.

According to one aspect, the gaming machine can be set and operated in a good working environment.

It is a perspective view which shows an example of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows an example of the game board of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the control system of the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the structure of the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collective display device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the probability setting value change processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the probability setting value confirmation processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory map of the game control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the winning number counter area of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port 1 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure hold information determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 game processing of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing of the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 variation start processing of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation in the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during fluctuation of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during change in the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of processing during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the external information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command check processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the received command analysis processing in the effect control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the outline of the information disclosure function of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the information disclosure processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting screen of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the collection process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collected data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the aggregation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the aggregated data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of securing the minimum information amount in the aggregated data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output information editing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the in-game disclosure processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the information disclosure screen of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the information disclosure screen of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion mode of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the non-game disclosure process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the in-game disclosure processing of the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display sequence of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect control unit of the variation display of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program of the effect control unit and the reference table group in the first half variation of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program of the effect control unit, and the reference table group in the sub-effect of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program and the reference table group in the first half variation execution control of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control program and a table selection pattern in the first half variation of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the sub-effect of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table data of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the first half effect distribution processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal loss processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the PB background change processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the first half variation modified in the development process of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the first half variation modified in the development process of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view (the 1) which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view (No. 2) which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the item appearing from the baggage and the content thereof in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the item appearing from a treasure box and the content thereof in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 4) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect content which is performed when the push button is pressed and when the push button is not pressed in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button in the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the baggage setting processing in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 2 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the effect in the modification 3 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 3 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 3 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 3 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol in the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol used in the game state in the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparison of the case of deriving "777" in the special figure 1 variation display game and the case of deriving "777" in the special figure 2 variation display game in the modification 4 of the third embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the display screen displayed by the display device in the modification 4 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol used in the game state in the modification 5 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparison of two big hits in the modification 5 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the symbol form of the decorative symbol in the variation display game of the variation 6 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen of the 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen and the movable accessory of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen and the movable accessory of the modification 1 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the modification 2 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen and the movable accessory of the modification 3 of the 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen and the light guide plate of the modification 4 of the 5th Embodiment. This is an example of a timing chart showing the temporal relationship between the error display (blinking display) and the effect of hiding the error display. It is a figure which shows the state display device which is a display means of a base, and the storage area for a base. It is a figure which shows the display example by the state display device. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the command system of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the command system of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the command at the time of change of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution table of 6th Embodiment (the 1). It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution table of 6th Embodiment (the 2). It is a figure which shows an example of the relation table of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect distribution processing of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production distribution of the modification 1 of the 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect distribution processing of the modification 1 of the 6th Embodiment. It is a perspective view (No. 1) which shows an example of the gaming machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a perspective view (No. 2) which shows an example of the gaming machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control state after power-on in the gaming machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of transition from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification mode of the notification regarding the setting change and the notification about the RAM clear in the display device of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the notification mode of the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding the RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows an example of the notification mode of the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding the RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a notification mode for notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the output mode of the different notification sound in the case of controlling the sound output of different notification sounds of the seventh embodiment at the same time. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the output mode of the different notification sound in the case of controlling the sound output of different notification sounds of the seventh embodiment at the same time. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the notification setting process at the time of power-on of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the notification end setting process at the time of power-on of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification corresponding to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification corresponding to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example (3) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 4th) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification corresponding to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control state after power-on in the gaming machine of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of transition from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) of the modification 1 of the 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example (the 1) of the output mode of a different notification sound in the case where the sound output control of the different notification sounds of the modification 2 of the seventh embodiment is performed at the same time. It is a figure which shows an example (the 2) of the output mode of the different notification sound in the case of controlling the sound output of the different notification sounds of the modification 2 of the seventh embodiment at the same time. It is a figure which shows an example (the 3) of the output mode of the different notification sound in the case of controlling the sound output of the different notification sounds of the modification 2 of the seventh embodiment at the same time.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. An outlet 22 for the upper plate to be discharged, a lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls discharged when the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an option setting unit 25 in which the player sets various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the decision button switch 25b functions as a decision button switch for determining the effect mode. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 10 intervenes the operation of the player based on the operation of the player received from the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b. Can be done. For example, the effect in which the operation of the player is intervened includes the effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the gaming machine 10 is the display device. The character displayed on the 41 can be operated, and the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

Further, on the right side of the option setting unit 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) that displays the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device transfers the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire towards (see Figure 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b, the player can, for example, set the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and set the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area (display area) where the image on the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the upper part of the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal map start gate) 34 that gives a start condition for the normal map variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the prize in the normal figure start gate 34 (the game ball that passes through the normal figure start gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variable winning device 38 described later. The winning opening 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won a prize in these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a start winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won a prize in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.
Further, a normal variable winning device 37 (a normal variable winning device 37) which is located below the normal figure start gate 34 and which gives a start condition of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) to the right part of the center case 40. The first start winning opening and the starting winning area) are provided. The normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 1) is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right. 37b is always in a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in because it is almost vertical. Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side tilts to the right and normally fluctuates. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 1 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normally variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and it may be difficult to win a prize in the closed state than in the open state. The ordinary variable winning device 37 corresponds to an ordinary electric accessory (Public electric).

A flow path 91 through which the game ball can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and the game ball that has not won the normal variable winning device 37 flows downward through the flow path 91. A starting winning opening 92 is provided in the lower part of the flow path 91, and a guide portion 93 is provided in the lower part of the flow path 91. The guide portion 93 has an inclined surface on which the upper surface 94 descends to the left, and the upper surface 94 catches a game ball flowing downward without winning a prize in the starting winning opening 92, and a special variable winning device 38 described later is present on the left. It is designed to guide you toward you.

The start winning opening 92 is a second starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game), and the starting winning opening 92 (starting opening 2) is used. The winning game ball is detected by the starting port 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. It is set up. The special variable winning device 38 has an opening / closing member (opening / closing door) 38c, and the opening / closing member 38c is in a closed state (disadvantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The opening / closing member 38c retracts from the closed state) and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted. That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes a large winning opening (large winning opening) opened and closed by an opening / closing member 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and is provided with a special variable winning opening game. And during the big hit game state (first special game state) as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, or during the small hit game state (second special game state) as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the big prize opening is opened. By converting from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. ..

The special variable winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality (for example, two) of large winning opening switches 38a. Further, the special variable winning device 38 is not limited to one, and may be provided by two, and when there are a plurality of large winning openings, the large winning opening switch 38a is about one or two for each. , X pieces (see FIG. 3) may be provided as a whole.

Further, a warp opening (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side portion of the center case 40. The game ball that has flowed into the warp flow path from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp outlet 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the starting winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b can easily win the starting winning opening 36.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming ball flows down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to start the starting winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (general winning opening on the right side of the special variable winning device 38). You can aim to win a prize (excluding 35), and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), you can win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, etc. You can aim at.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are reached. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map fluctuation display game triggered by a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of LEDs and the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a normal symbol display unit. It includes 55, a normal drawing hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the batch display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. The CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110, the input unit 120 having an input port, the output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130 are connected to each other. It consists of a data bus 140 and the like.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit of the gaming microcomputer 111. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like that generates a clock. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of direct current voltage such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400. To be operational.

The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from an AC power supply of 24V, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and the like. A normal power supply unit 410 having a power supply unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure in the game control device 100. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the occurrence and recovery of.

In the first embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on a separate board or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, , May be configured to be provided on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the generation unit 430, it is possible to exclude it from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127. The set value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 inserts a setting key to enable switching between an ON state and an OFF state. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to change the hit probabilities of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game according to the setting of 6 stages.

The game control device 100 transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be changed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON. For example, the game control device 100 makes it possible to cyclically change from setting 1 to setting 6 by detecting the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability set value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying the set value, and is, for example, a one-digit 7-segment LED mounted on a substrate.

Further, the game control device 100 transitions to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation of the gaming machine 10 can be performed by turning on the power while the setting key switch 127 is ON and the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF. .. For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. Derived A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of "no reach" <"normal reach" <"special 1 reach" <"special 2 reach" <"special 3 reach" <"premier reach". Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Variable pattern random number for determining (including the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach or reach), the random number generation circuit for generating the hit random number for determining the hit of the normal figure variable display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms (ms)) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. A variable pattern table is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables based on the state), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of start memories, and the like. To get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, and the like, and is a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the game machine 10 in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Is driven, and control is performed to pay out the prize ball. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10, and controls to pay out the ball lending. ..

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a start port 1 switch 36a in the start winning port 36, a start port 1 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, a start port 2 switch 92a in the start winning port 92, and a general drawing. It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided to which a signal is input and converted into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. The detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10 is also input to the proximity I / F 121. Further, in the proximity I / F121, since the input range is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as floating and output an abnormality detection signal.

Explaining the winning opening switch 35a, although the winning opening switch 35a is shown by one block in FIG. 3, a plurality of (N) winning opening switches 35a (three in the present embodiment) are actually used. Is provided on the game board 30, and each signal is input to the proximity I / F 121 with different signal lines. Further, although the large winning opening switch 38a is shown by one block in FIG. 3, a plurality of (X) large winning opening switches 38a (three in the present embodiment) are actually provided on the game board 30. Has been done. Then, these plurality of large winning opening switches 38a are connected by different signal lines, or are wired or on a relay board (not shown) existing between the switch and the game control device 100 (main board), for example. It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR). The panel radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 described later may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired or.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, 37a, the start port 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a are the second input port 123. Is entered in. The signal outputs (outputs from the proximity I / F 121) of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, which are the start port switches in FIG. 1, are shown by one signal line in FIG. 3, but are actually shown. There are two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10, detection signal of setting value change switch 126, detection signal of setting key switch 127, RAM initial The detection signal of the conversion switch 112 is input.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. There is.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

For the data held by the second input port 123, the gaming microcomputer 111 asserts the enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 (to the effective level). It can be read by changing). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting the radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not the 200 can accept commands), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for the input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in the original signal) and the out-ball detection switch signal (the signal output when the out-ball is detected) and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

The out ball detection switch signal is a signal output from the out sensor each time the out sensor (not shown) detects one out ball of the gaming machine 10. For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in the discharge flow path (not shown) between the discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game ball (out ball) from the game machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out-ball detection switch signal is used to calculate the game performance (for example, base) per predetermined operation (for example, 60,000 out-balls), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the status display device 135. The out-ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300. In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determining the operating state, which is a trigger for switching to the game effect or the customer waiting screen display. For example, the status display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the game performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration so that the detection signal of the vibration sensor switch is input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these inputs. It has a function to remove noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured to do. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but the input unit 120 is set immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is a one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch such as a start port switch that does not need to be processed, which is output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine plays a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus. It has become like.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open / close the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), the opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A first output port 134a for outputting the opening / closing data of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening / closing and the display data of the status display device 135 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 136. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 134c for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 134d for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 134e for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal plate 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10. Can be supplied to an external device via a photo relay. A part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 134e to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open / close data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the peripheral electric solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 134c. External information signals supplied from the third driver 138c, the fifth output port 134e, and the fourth output port 134d that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. A fifth driver 138e is provided, which receives a display data signal of the status display device 135 output from the first output port 134a and a fourth driver 138d to output, and generates and outputs a drive signal of the status display device 135.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal plate 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. Further, the status display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the status display device 135 may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the external board (not shown) side instead of the main board. ..

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 490. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, 124 are used. Not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a PROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and can hold stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A Fe RAM (Ferroelectric RAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that is a time measuring means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command (effect command) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, and decorates the lamp. Lights up, controls the drive of motors and solenoids, manages the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 is connected to an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. Has been done.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal for this purpose, such as WAIT, is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30, and a board provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect switch that detects the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44. A function to detect the on / off state of 47 (effect motor switch) and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a function to detect the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 for main control. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting a detection signal to the microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, it is supplied to the VDP 312 (VDPReSET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and the control circuit 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drives and controls lamps, motors, etc., in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311. And put these in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on. Further, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a random value for hit determination in the normal figure is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B Compared with the judgment value stored in, the process of judging the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Then, a process is performed in which the identification symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display unit 55 of the batch display device 50, and then the normal symbol variation display game to be stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of this normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 55, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the normal map symbol display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the starting prize (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36 and the starting opening 1 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37. , A process of extracting a random value for jackpot determination of the first special figure variation display game based on this start memory, comparing it with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and determining the hit / miss of the first special figure variation display game. To do. Further, the starting memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 92a provided in the starting winning opening 92, and based on this starting memory, the jackpot determination randomness of the second special figure variation display game is performed. The numerical value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command, effect command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. do. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a special symbol variation display game to be stopped and displayed. To do. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, starting winning opening 92) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. It serves as a game control means.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process of executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating a special gaming state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A is, for example, a special variation winning device 38 by a large winning opening solenoid 38b. The opening / closing member 38c of the game is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the large winning opening. In this special gaming state, the CPU 111A is subject to either a condition that a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round is to open the big winning opening until it is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds, and control (cycle game) is performed. In addition, a small hit game state is generated due to the result of the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) or the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) being a small hit. In the process, the CPU 111A controls, for example, to open the opening / closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening.

The opening / closing operation pattern (opening / closing operation mode) of the large winning opening performed in these small hit game states is, for example, an operation of keeping the opening / closing member in the open state for 200 msec four times at 1500 msec intervals. As described above, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the CPU 111A controls to display the result mode of the out of place on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the batch display device 50.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the 1st special figure variation display game or the 2nd special figure variation display game, the 1st special figure variation display game and the 2nd special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state in the normal figure) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) should be a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, Opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second hit stop symbol and opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the third hit stop symbol It is possible to set it to be 3 times).

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal electric opening number of times, and the normal electric opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in a time-saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game to be a second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time-saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, twice) for the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It can be a probability (a high probability state in the normal map, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated. In addition, the time saving state can also be referred to as a normal electric support state (during normal electric support or electric support).

Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the batch display device of the first embodiment. The batch display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1, a 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18. The collective display device 50 displays various states according to the lighting modes of the 7-segment LED_d1, the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LEDs_d3 to the LED_d18.

The batch display device 50 distributes various status display functions from the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2, and from the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53. A special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, a normal symbol symbol display unit 55, a normal figure hold display unit 56, a status display unit 57, and a special figure 2 hold display unit 58 are provided. The round display unit 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game according to the lighting mode of the four LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d6. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 displays the symbol in the special figure 1 game according to the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d1. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbol in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of eight LEDs (seven segment LEDs and one dot LED) of the seven-segment LED_d2. The normal symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the normal symbol game according to the lighting mode of the three LEDs of LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal figure hold display unit 56 displays the number of hold in the normal figure game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The state display unit 57 displays the gaming state in the special figure game according to the lighting mode of the three LEDs of LED_d7, LED_d9, and LED_d17. The special figure 2 hold display unit 58 displays the number of holds in the special figure 2 game according to the lighting mode of the two LEDs of LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6 to 8 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the game control unit (CPU111A).

The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper level is 00h or 01h. In step S4, 00h, which is on the head side of the address range of the RAM 111C, is set.

Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power-on delay timer is performed by using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to validity determination (checksum calculation) of the data held in the RAM area. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the third input port 124, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated by reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch can be operated from the power-on to the standby time. It is necessary to continue to operate 112. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

Further, the detection signal of the setting value change switch 126 and the detection signal of the setting key switch 127 are input to the third input port 124, and the state of the third input port 124 is checked before the start of the standby time. By reading, the operation of the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 are operated or the power is turned on after the waiting time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 from the time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operations, and the setting change operation performed at the time of turning on the power or It is possible to prevent the situation where the setting confirmation operation is not accepted.

Next, after performing a process of setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7), a process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). To do. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on or not is set. A determination is made (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine 10 is waited to be cut off. .. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated to "-1" (step S11), and the timer value is "0". (Step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission of RWM (Read Write Memory) such as RAM111C and EEPROM that can be read and written is granted (step). S13), off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the first embodiment) is set (step S15). It is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16).

Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S16; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). (Step S17) If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), the checksum calculation process (step S18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed.

In the checksum calculation process, the sum of the data in the game control work area and the data in the status display work area may be calculated as a checksum, or the data in the game control work area and the status display work may be calculated. The checksum may be calculated separately from the data in the area, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data in the game control work area. The game control work area is a work area used for game control in the storage area in the RWM. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S18 and the checksum when the power is turned off match (step S19), and if the checksums match (step S19; Y), the beginning of the RAM clear. The RAM clear start address 2 is set as the address (step S20). The RAM clear start address 2 is an address whose probability set value is excluded from the clear target.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (step S21). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S50 (see FIG. 8), and if the probability setting value is not being changed (step S21; N), the process proceeds to step S22.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the main body frame (front frame) 12 is in the open state (step S22). When the main body frame 12 is in the open state (step S22; Y), the process proceeds to step S23, and when the main body frame 12 is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S23). When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S50, and when the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S23; N), the process proceeds to step S24.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the set value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24). When the set value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S56, and when the set value change switch 126 is not in the ON state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S25.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step S25). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step S25; Y), the process proceeds to step S59, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step S25; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7). , Perform the processing when it recovers normally from the power failure.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or if the checksum is determined to be abnormal (step S19; N), step. Move to S46 and guide the RAM clear by changing the setting.

Next, when the process proceeds to step S26, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S26), and the special figure status (the state indicated by the data set in the special figure status area described later) indicates. ) To determine whether or not the special figure game is in high probability (step S27). Then, if the special figure game is in high probability (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S28, and if the special figure game is not in high probability (step S27; N), the process proceeds to step S30.

When the special figure game is in high probability, the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S28), and the on data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area (step S29).

Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31.
Here, the area to be initialized in step S26 is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In step S26, the busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is confirmed. It is an indefinite state indicating that there is no such thing. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, and a screen designation command are used. To send. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. The screen-designated commands are the control states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, both of which are normally being processed (during fluctuation, during big hit (first special game state), during small hit (first). 2 It is a command to instruct the display of the customer waiting demo screen in the case of a state) which is neither of the special game states), and the command to instruct the display of the recovery screen in other cases.

In step S31, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal, and a timer interrupt signal. It includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a pattern that defines how to replace the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition). be. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value random number, small). After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) of the hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34).

Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (big hit symbol random number) that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special symbol, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the small hit stop of the special symbol. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (small hit symbol random number) that determines the symbol. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" determines the hit symbol of the normal figure fluctuation game. It is a random number that is the initial value of a random number (hit symbol random number). It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not exist in the model without the small hit, and the hit symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model.

Further, in the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on, so that this value is used as the initial value of various initial value random numbers. By setting (start value), the regularity of random numbers generated by software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuously updating the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the winning random number, and the winning symbol random number are the program's. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a processing unit. In addition, in the case of big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each of the above random numbers may be a counter-type update by "+1" or "-1", or may be a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S35, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. If such a method is adopted, both of them are used. In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. When the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S39) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step S44) for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area, access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the process (step S45), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

Next, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or when the checksum is determined to be abnormal (step S19; N), Guidance for clearing the RAM by changing the settings performed in step S46 and subsequent steps will be described.

When guiding the RAM clear by changing the setting, the RAM clear start address 1 is set as the start address at the time of RAM clear (step S46). The RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control area. The RAM clear start address 1 is an address that designates the entire game control work area and the game control stack area as clear targets.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the main body frame (front frame) 12 is in the open state (step S47). When the main body frame 12 is in the open state (step S47; Y), the process proceeds to step S48, and when the main body frame 12 is not in the open state (step S47; N), the process proceeds to step S49.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S48). When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S48; Y), the process proceeds to step S50, and when the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S48; N), the process proceeds to step S49.

In step S49, the command for instructing the setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) to guide the RAM clear by changing the setting via the effect control device 300. For example, the gaming machine 10 guides the RAM clear by changing the setting by the guidance display by the display device 41 and the guidance sound (including voice) output by the speakers 19a and 19b.

The gaming machine 10 performs a process (step S45) of prohibiting access to the RAM without saving the check data in the power failure inspection area after guiding the RAM to be cleared by changing the setting, and then the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Wait for it to be blocked. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the set value from being initialized at a timing not intended by the administrator by prompting the setting change prior to the initialization when the data is abnormal.

Next, when it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed (step S21; Y) or when it is determined that the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S23; Y, step S48; Y), the step The process related to the probability setting value change performed in S50 or later will be described.

In the process related to the probability setting value change, the data in the clear target area (game control work area) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, RAM111C) is cleared to zero (step S50), and the initial stage is set. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be converted (step S51). The initial value saved in step S51 includes information (for example, a timer value) for outputting a security signal after the start of changing the set value. The security signal may be output only for a predetermined time, or may be continuously output while the set value is being changed.

Further, the flag for changing the probability set value is set (step S52). The probability setting value changing flag indicates that the probability setting value is being changed in the set state, and indicates that the probability setting value is not being changed in the reset state.

Further, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S53), the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, and the value is saved in the working probability setting value area (step S54). ).

Further, by transmitting a command for which the probability setting is being changed (for example, a command for changing the (probability setting)) to the effect control board (effect control device 300), the effect control device 300 is notified that the probability setting is being changed. Notify (step S55). When the process related to the probability setting value change up to step S55 is executed, the process proceeds to step S31.

Next, when the setting value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the processing related to RAM initialization performed in step S56 and subsequent steps will be described. In the process related to RAM initialization, the RAM clear start address 2 is set as the start address at the time of RAM clear (step S56). The RAM clear start address 2 is an address that excludes the probability set value area from being cleared.

Further, the data in the clear target area (game control work area) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, RAM111C) is cleared to zero (step S57), and the RAM is initially set in the area to be initialized. The initial value at the time of conversion is saved (step S58).

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S59), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S59, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, and a RAM initialization command (customer waiting demo screen). Is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and the subordinate control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. Etc.), and the main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device at the time of turning on the power (game control). The device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, in the main control means (game control device 100), the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. Based on this, an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the standby time.

The game control device 100 of the first embodiment divides the initialization process (first initialization process) at the time of data abnormality and the initialization process (second initialization process) at the time of initialization operation. Since it has functions (first initialization means, second initialization means) to be executed separately, it is possible to realize the optimum and lean initialization processing according to the situation.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is operated by a RAM 111C that can store data, a setting operation unit (setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127) that can be operated from the outside, and a setting operation unit. The setting change means (game control device 100) for changing the set value stored in the RAM 111C based on the setting can be changed, and the setting display unit (probability setting value display device 136) is provided. This makes it possible to check the settings (set values).

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs between the time when the interrupt is enabled and the time when the interrupt is disabled (steps S34 to S39) in the above-mentioned main process. The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step S61). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S62). In step S62, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, input of signals, that is, input processing (step S63) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, the output process (step S64) for controlling the drive of the actuator such as the solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission seen from the game control device 100, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission seen from the payout control device 200. Is also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to launch.

Next, the random number update process 1 (step S65) and the random number update process 2 (step S66) are performed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. .. Further, the random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In addition to the random number update process 1 or the random number update process 1, the random number update process 2 may stop the random number update during the setting change or change the update cycle.

After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, 37a, the starting port 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and error. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S67) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed. In addition, a start port switch monitoring process (step S68) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, if there is a game ball winning in the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 forming the first starting winning opening, or the starting winning opening 92 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers are generated. (Big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the game result is determined in advance based on the prize at the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game. The game result is determined in advance.

Next, in step S69, the probability setting value change process relating to the change of the probability setting value is performed. In step S70, the probability setting value changing flag is referred to, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed, and if the probability setting value is being changed (step S70; Y), the process proceeds to step S75 to set the probability. If the value is not being changed (step S70; N), the process proceeds to step S71. In step S71, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is referred to, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress, and if the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S71; Y), the process proceeds to step S75. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S71; N), the process proceeds to step S72. The probability setting value confirmation mode flag is a flag that is set or reset in the probability setting value confirmation process described later.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S72) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a special figure 1 game process (step S73a) that performs a process related to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 1 game process. The special figure 2 game process (step S73b) for processing the special figure 2 variable display game and the normal figure game process (step S74) for processing the normal figure variable display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED (for example, an LED of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the batch display device 50) provided on the game machine 10 and displaying various information related to the display of the special figure variation display game and the game is desired. From the segment LED editing process (step S75) that drives to display, the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S76) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether there is an abnormality, and the panel radio wave sensor 62. The panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S77), which checks the detection signal of the above and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, is performed. Then, external information editing processing (step S78) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer and status display editing output processing (step S79) for status display are performed, and timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine that needs to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S64) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the output process of the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the segment output port (third output port 134c) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device 50 (step S81). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port (first output port 134a) that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 38b is combined and output (step S82).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device 50 is updated by "+1" in the range of "0" to "3" (step S83), and the LED digit corresponding to the value of the digit counter is digitized. The line output data is acquired (step S84). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting the LED_d18 from the LED_d1 of the batch display device 50, a round display, a special figure 1 hold display, a special figure 1 symbol display, a special figure 2 symbol display, a normal symbol symbol display, a normal figure hold display, and There is a state display (game state display such as time saving state and high probability state).

Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S85), and the combined data is output to the digit / external information output port (fourth output port 134d) for digit output and external information output (step S86). ). The external information synthesized in step S85 is "door / frame opening" and "security signal".

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S87), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port (third output port 134c) for segment output (3rd output port 134c). Step S88).

Subsequently, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal plate 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S89). The external information synthesized here includes "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "design fixed number of times signal", "starting port signal", and "main prize ball". "Signal" etc. Next, the combined data and the output data of the launch permission are combined (step S90), and the combined data is used as an external information / launch permission signal output port (fifth output port 134e) for external information output and launch permission signal output. Is output to (step S91).

Next, the off output data of the probability setting value display is set. That is, off-data is output (reset) to the probability setting value display output port (second output port 134b) that outputs the probability setting value display data of the probability setting value display device 136 (step S92).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S93). If the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S93; Y), the process proceeds to step S94, and if the probability set value display permission flag is not set (step S93; N), the process proceeds to step S95.

When the probability set value display permission flag is set, the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value is loaded from the set value display data area in the RWM (step S94).
In step S95, the probability set value display data is output to the probability set value display output port (second output port 134b).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S96). After that, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S97).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S98). Further, the data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S99). Then, the data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 ( Step S9a).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S9b). The test signal output data loads the probability set value display data (for example, 7-segment data) corresponding to the probability set value from the set value display data area in the RWM, but the probability set value can be confirmed. If there is, it may be a probability setting value (for example, a numerical value from 1 to 6) or data in other formats.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S9c). When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S9c; Y), the process proceeds to step S9d, and when the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S9c; N), the process proceeds to step S9e.

When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state, the test signal output data of the loaded probability setting value and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S9d).
In step S9e, the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 6 on the relay board 70, and the output process is completed.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S67) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, the probability setting value changing flag is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (step S101). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S101; Y), the process proceeds to step S109, and if the probability setting value is not being changed (step S101; N), the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is referred to, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress, and if the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S102; Y), the process proceeds to step S109. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S102; N), the process proceeds to step S103.

Next, the winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, the port number to which the detection signal from the counting switch is input) corresponding to the large winning opening switch 38a (count switch) in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) or the like. (The data indicating the bit position and the like in the signal port is stored) is prepared (step S103). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S104) is executed to monitor whether or not there is a fraud (illegal winning) to win a prize in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open, and to detect a normal winning. ..

After that, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 37a) in the Fuden is prepared (step S105), and fraudulent & winning monitoring processing (step S105) is performed to monitor for illegal winning and detect normal winning. Step S106) is executed.

Next, the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring processing, that is, the winning opening switch that can always win (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) is monitored. The table is prepared (step S107), and the winning number counter update process (step S108) for updating the winning number is performed.

Next, the value of the status scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of switches and signals for which the error status of the gaming machine 10 should be monitored is to be monitored this time is "0". To update within the range of "3" (step S109). After that, depending on the value of the status scan counter, any of the switch error 1 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection, the shoot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout error error. The game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the monitoring of the error based on the crab is prepared (step S110). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S111) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, a gaming machine status monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on any of the glass frame opening, the main body frame opening, the frame radio wave fraud, and the touch switch according to the value of the status scan counter. (Step S112). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S113) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S114), and if the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S114; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring End the process. In this case, there is no monitoring target for the gaming machine status in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S114; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch error 2 error output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like according to the value of the status scan counter. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the above is prepared (step S115). Then, the gaming machine status check process (step S116) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed, the payout busy signal check process (step S117) is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. The payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is executed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring is performed in a 16 ms cycle.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, the details of the probability setting value change process (step S69) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the probability set value change process of the first embodiment.

First, the probability setting value changing flag is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (step S121). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S121; Y), the process proceeds to step S123, and if the probability setting value is not being changed (step S121; N), the process proceeds to step S122, and the probability setting value confirmation process (step S122) is executed. After that, the probability setting value change process is terminated. The details of the probability set value confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the probability setting value is being changed, the probability setting value off timer is updated. Specifically, the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is referred to, and when the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is not "0", the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is updated by decrementing "1" (step S123). ..

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is "0" (step S124), and when the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is "0" (step S124; Y), step S125. If the value of the probability set value extinguishing timer is not “0” (step S124; N), the process proceeds to step S126.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value has been changed by referring to the probability setting value changed flag (step S126), and if the probability setting value has been changed, the process proceeds to step S127, and if the probability setting value has not been changed, the process proceeds to step S127. To step S133. The probability setting value changed flag is a flag that is set when the probability setting value is changed (probability setting value confirmation operation).

When the probability set value has been changed (step S126; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127). When the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127; Y), the process related to RAM initialization after changing the probability set value is performed in step S128 or later, and when the setting key switch 127 is not in the OFF state (step S127; N). ) Ends the probability setting value change process.

Next, when the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127; Y), the processing related to RAM initialization performed in step S128 and subsequent steps will be described. In the process related to RAM initialization, the RAM clear start address 3 is set as the start address at the time of RAM clear (step S128). The RAM clear start address 3 is an address that excludes the probability set value area, the random number area for fluctuation patterns (random number updated by the random number update process 2), and the initial value random number area. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can effectively utilize the random number agitation during the setting change. The RAM clear start address 3 may be an address in which the probability set value area is excluded from the clear target and the variation pattern random number area and the initial value random number area are included in the clear target.

Next, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to zero (step S129), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S130). The initial value saved in step S130 includes information for outputting a security signal (for example, a timer value). The security signal may be output only for a predetermined time, or may be continuously output while the set value is being changed.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S131). By including the information related to the setting change (for example, the probability setting value display data, etc.) in the RAM clear target, the probability setting value after the probability setting value change and the information related to the setting change before the probability setting value change can be obtained. Inconsistency can be prevented.

Further, the command for completing the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S132), and the process proceeds to step S34 (see FIG. 7) of the main process. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S132, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, and a command to end the probability setting change (customer waiting demo). Along with displaying the screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may also serve as a RAM clear notification in addition to the notification of the end of the probability setting change or in place of the notification of the end of the probability setting change. Further, in step S132, a RAM initialization command may be transmitted in addition to the command for ending the probability setting change or in place of the command for ending the probability setting change.

If the probability set value has not been changed (step S126; N), the processing after step S133 is performed. In step S133, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch 126 (step S133). If there is an input from the set value change switch 126, the process proceeds to step S134, and if there is no input from the set value change switch 126 (step S133; N), the process proceeds to step S137.

When there is an input from the setting value change switch 126 (step S133; Y), the value in the working probability setting value area (working probability setting value) is incremented by "1", and the range is in the range of "0" to "5". Update cyclically with (step S134). The working probability setting value is set to 6 stages from "0" to "5", but is not limited to this, and may be 3 stages, 10 stages, or the like as long as it is a value corresponding to the probability setting value. Further, although the working probability set value has a one-to-one correspondence with the probability set value, it may have a one-to-many correspondence with the probability set value. For example, when the probability setting value is in 3 stages from "0" to "2", the work probability setting value is set in 6 stages from "0" to "5", and the probability setting values are "0", "1", and ". The work probability setting values "0, 1", "2, 3", and "4,5" may be associated with each of "2".

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S135), and the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinguishing timer area (step). S136). The probability set value extinguishing timer area is an area for providing a blank display on the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the probability set value display device 136 can perform a blank display every time there is a set value change operation (input from the set value change switch 126).

Next, in step S137, it is determined whether or not there is a confirmation operation for changing the set value. For example, the confirmation operation of changing the set value can be a touch switch signal. The operation for confirming the change of the set value may use an input different from the touch switch signal, or may use an input signal from a separately provided dedicated operation switch, or input from two or more switches. A signal combination or the like may be used. If there is a confirmation operation for changing the set value, the process proceeds to step S138, and if there is no confirmation operation for changing the set value (step S137; N), the probability setting value change process is terminated.

When there is a confirmation operation for changing the set value (step S137; Y), the value in the probability setting value area for work is loaded, saved in the probability setting value area (step S138), and the probability setting value corresponding to the probability setting value is displayed. The data is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S139), and the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S140).

Further, a command for changing the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S141), and the probability set value change process is completed. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S141, a command for changing the probability set value (for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and notifying the change of the probability set value with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). In addition to the command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a probability setting value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability may be transmitted.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability set value confirmation process (step S122) in the above-mentioned probability set value change process will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the probability set value confirmation process of the first embodiment.

In step S151, the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is referred to, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress, and if the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S151; Y), the process proceeds to step S159. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S152.

If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S151; N), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S152), it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S153), and if the game is not in progress, the step is taken. The process proceeds to S154, and when the game is in progress (step S153; Y), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. It should be noted that the term “during a game” refers to a game state in which the player is highly likely to be playing, and for example, there are a special figure change, a normal figure change, a special figure hit, a normal figure hit, and the like. Further, the term “during a game” may include a gaming state in which the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold are present.

When not in the game (step S153; N), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S154). If the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S155, and if the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S154; N), the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated.

When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S154; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set (step S155), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S156), and the security signal control timer is set. The initial value is saved in the area (step S157). By saving the initial value in the security signal control timer area, the security signal is output only for the probability set value display time set as the initial value. The security signal is not limited to the probability set value display time set as the initial value, and may be continuously output during the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, a command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S158), and the probability set value confirmation process is completed. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S158, a command for confirming the probability set value (for displaying the customer waiting demo screen and notifying the confirmation of the probability set value with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). In addition to the command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a probability setting value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability may be transmitted.

When the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S151; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S159). If the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S160, and if the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S159; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated.

When the setting key switch 127 is not in the ON state (step S159; N), the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is cleared (step S160), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S161).

Further, a command to end the probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S162), and the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S162, a command for completing the probability set value confirmation (to display the customer waiting demo screen and to notify the probability set value confirmation by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). In addition to the command), a plurality of commands such as a model specification command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a probability setting value information command may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of production and information on the number of times of high probability may be transmitted.

Next, the memory map of the RAM 111C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a memory map of the game control device of the first embodiment. The memory map 111M is a memory map of the RAM 111C. The RAM 111C sets a game control work area, a game control stack area, a state display work area, and a state display stack area in order from the beginning of the memory. Further, the RAM 111C clearly separates the game control stack area and the status display work area by setting an unused area of 16 bytes or more between the game control stack area and the status display work area. Further, although the RAM 111C sets an unused area after the status display stack area, the state display stack area may be set so as to include the end of the memory without providing the unused area. Further, the RAM 111C may set an unused area between the game control work area and the game control stack area, or between the state display work area and the state display stack area.

Since the probability setting value area is arranged at the head of the game control work area, the RAM clear start address 1 targets all of the game control work area (game control work area) and the game control stack area. do. Further, the RAM clear start address 2 targets the game control work area and the game control stack area excluding the probability set value area. Further, the RAM clear start address 3 targets the game control work area and the game control stack area excluding the probability set value area, the fluctuation pattern random number area, and the initial value random number area. Further, all of the RAM clear start address 1, the RAM clear start address 2, and the RAM clear start address 3 target the area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the power failure inspection area 2 and the checksum area.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S72) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout command transmission process of the first embodiment. Further, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a structural example of the winning number counter area of the first embodiment.

First, an example of the winning number counter area will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, for example, the winning number counter area 1 includes 3 prize ball counters, 10 prize ball counters, and 14 prize ball counters, respectively. The winning number counter can store up to 65535 winnings. Next, as shown in FIG. 16, for example, the winning number counter area 2 includes 3 prize ball counters, 10 prize ball counters, and 14 prize ball counters, and each prize number counter can store up to 255 prizes. It has become. In the check of the count number of the prize number counter area, the above-mentioned counters are checked in order from the top (from the three prize ball counters) by updating the address of the prize number counter area in step S202 or the like described later.

Next, in FIG. 15, the left column is a process of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the right column is a process of transmitting a payout command.
In the payout command transmission process, first, as described with reference to FIG. 16, the counters of the plurality of prize number counter areas 2 provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Among them, it is determined whether or not the counter to be checked has a count number other than "0" (step S201). Then, when there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and the check of the count numbers of all the counters in the winning number counter area 2 is completed. Whether or not it is determined (step S203).

If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number of the counter in the target winning number counter area 2 is subtracted (updated to "-1") (step S204), and the winning number counter is used. The number of payouts corresponding to the address of the area 2 (for example, any of the above-mentioned 3, 10, and 14) is acquired (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209). If the subtraction result is determined to be "0" or more (step S209; Y) in step S209, the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area. (Step S211).

In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process described later, a process of outputting the main prize ball signal is performed based on the number of times the main prize ball signal is output updated in step S210. Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) for every 10 payout schedules, and 10 pieces are paid out from the payout board (payout control device 200). One pulse is output for each.

Next, in the determination of step S203, it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in the determination of step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0" or more (step S209; N). If the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated by "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" because the initial value set in the final step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set. Therefore, the subtraction will not be performed.

Next, when it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213), and when it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), it is determined. It is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by reference to the port status but by reference to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy) are "payout operation", "ball lending operation", "shoot ball out error", "overflow error", and "frame radio wave fraud". "Medium", "Abnormal payout ball detection switch (switch to monitor paid out balls)", "Insufficient payout error", "Excessive payout error", "Award to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the remaining number of acquired game balls) (= when it is not 0) "and the like.

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215), and the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 is determined. If there is no count in (step S215; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the check of all areas is not completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, when the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated to "-1" (step S218), and the target counter is set to the address of the winning number counter area 1. The corresponding payout number command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S213; N), and when it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y). , When it is determined in step S217 that the check of all areas has been completed (step S217; Y), or when the process of step S221 is completed, this payout command transmission process is terminated.

As can be seen from the configuration in which the processing is terminated without executing steps S215 and subsequent steps depending on the determination results of steps S213 and S214, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed. I have sent it since then. Further, the transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control board side is in a state where the prize ball can be paid out.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step S68) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the start port switch monitoring process, first, the winning monitoring table of the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to perform the starting port. It is determined whether or not there is a prize in 1 (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the starting port 1 (step A103; Y), the gaming state should be right-handed (for example, a normal electric support state, a big hit, etc.). It is determined whether or not there is (step A104).

If it is determined in step A104 that the state is not a predetermined state to be right-handed (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the predetermined state should be right-handed (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. To do. That is, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, except for the normal electric support state, the starting port 1 is hardly awarded unless it is left-handed, and the starting port 1 is won in the predetermined state where it should be right-handed. In this case, since it can be estimated that the player has hit the left even though the state should be hit right, the right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit the right. It is configured to be done by.

Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 1 (step A107), the special figure start port 1 switch process (step A108) is performed.
Next, the winning monitoring table of the starting port 2 (starting winning opening 92) is prepared (step A109), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting opening 2. (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the starting port 2 (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the starting port 2 (step A111; Y), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal electric support state (time saving state) (step). If it is determined that A112) is not in the normal power support state (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (step A113). Further, in step A113, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game is in the final variation of the normal electric support (step A114).

If it is determined in step A114 that the final change of the normal power support is not in progress (step A114; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A115), and an effect command setting process (step A116) is performed. That is, if it is not in the normal power support state, the big hit, or the final fluctuation of the normal power support, it should be left-handed, so the process of transmitting the left-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 is performed.

Then, when it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric support state is in the normal electric support state (step A112; Y), and when it is determined in step A113 that the jackpot is in progress (step A113; Y), the general electric support is final in step A114. If it is determined that the fluctuation is in progress (step A114; Y), and if the process of step A116 is completed, the process proceeds to step A117.

When the process proceeds to step A117, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 (step A117), the special figure start port 2 switch process (step A118) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is completed.

If it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the starting port 2, for example, before executing step A112, it is normal for the public electric machine to be illegal (even though the normal variable winning device 37 is closed). A step is provided to determine whether or not there is an illegality in which a prize is detected in the variable winning device 37), and if it is determined that this general electric power illegality is occurring, the start port switch monitoring process is terminated without executing step A112 or later. It may be configured so that the second start memory (start memory of special figure 2) is not generated any more when there is an illegality of the electric power.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of the first embodiment.

In the hard random number acquisition process, first, of the starting port 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) and the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92), the non-winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set ( Step A121), among the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start port 2 switch 92a, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step). A124).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the starting port 1 and the starting port 2, the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port 1 switch process (step A108) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure start port 1 switch processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 1 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored (starting prize of the special figure 1 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 1 switch process, first, the start port signal 1 output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. The number of times is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the number of output times overflows (step A133). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 1 output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process passes through step A134 and proceeds to the process of step A135. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal 1 output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 holdes (number of start storages of special figure 1) of the update target corresponding to the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a of the monitoring target is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4). (Step A135). If the number of special figure 1 holdes to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port 1 switch process is terminated. When the number of special figure 1 holdings to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting fluctuation information (for example, for sorting look-ahead fluctuation patterns) is set (step A135; Y). Step A136), the number of special figure 1 holdes to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A137).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is used as the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 1 is extracted, prepared, saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A142), and the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 are stored. It is saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A143), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A144) is performed. After that, the decorative special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number to be monitored is prepared (step A145), the effect command setting process (step A146) is performed, and the special figure start port 1 switch process is completed. ..

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and the special figure variation display game. It is a starting prize storage means that stores up to a predetermined number as the starting memory that is the execution right of. Further, the start winning prize storage means (RAM111C) first starts various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) up to a predetermined number. Remember as a memory.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port 2 switch process (step A118) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure start port 2 switch processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure start port 2 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the start port 2 switch 92a to be monitored (starting prize of the special figure 2 to be monitored).
In the special figure start port 2 switch process, first, the start port signal 2 output number of times, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times the prize is won to the start port 2 switch 92a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded ( Step A151), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A152), and it is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (step A153). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 2 output count area of the RWM (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A153; Y), the process passes through step A154 and proceeds to the process of step A155. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal 2 output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 hold (starting storage) of the update target corresponding to the start port 2 switch 92a to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4) (step A155). If the number of special figure 2 holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A155; N), the special figure start port 2 switch processing is terminated. When the number of special figure 2 holdings to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A155; Y), the special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting fluctuation information (for example, for sorting look-ahead fluctuation patterns) is set (step A155; Y). In step A156), the number of special figures 2 held to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A157).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 2) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 2 is calculated (step A158), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is stored in the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (step A159). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared (step A160), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A161).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared, saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A162), and the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 are stored. It is saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A163), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A164) is performed. After that, a decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number to be monitored is prepared (step A165), an effect command setting process (step A166) is performed, and the special figure start port 2 switch process is completed. ..

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning area of the starting winning opening 92, and becomes the right to execute the special figure variation display game. It serves as a starting prize storage means for storing a predetermined number as a memory up to a predetermined number. Further, the start winning winning storage means (RAM111C) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92) as the second starting storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A144, step A164) in the above-mentioned special figure start port 1 switch process and special figure start port 2 switch process will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process of the first embodiment.

The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process in which the result-related information corresponding to the start memory is determined before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (high probability medium) (step A172). If it is determined in step A172 that the probability is high (step A172; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A172 that the probability is not high (step A172; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (step A173). If it is determined in step A173 that the jackpot is in progress (step A173; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A173 that the jackpot is not in progress (step A173; N), the jackpot determination process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Step A174) is performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A175). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A175; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch (in other words, special figure type; special figure 1 or special figure 2 type) is displayed. It is set (step A176), the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A140 or A160 is acquired (step A177), the process proceeds to the process of step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A175; N), the small hit determination process (step A179) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value. Do it. After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A180). Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A180; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A183), the process proceeds to the process of step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A180; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set, and the small hit stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162 is set. (Step A182), the process proceeds to the process of step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A184, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set in any one of step A177, step A182, or step A183 is prepared (step A184), and the effect command setting process (step). Perform A185). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A186) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process (step A187) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed. To do.

After that, the look-ahead variation pattern corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern (variation pattern until the start of the reach action) and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern (variation pattern after the start of the reach action) in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. A command is prepared (step A188), an effect command setting process (step A189) is performed, and the special figure hold information determination process is completed.

The special figure information setting process in step A186 and the variation pattern setting process in step A187 are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process (special figure 1 normal process or special figure 2 normal process described later). It is the same as the processing. That is, when the special figure hold information determination process is executed in step A144, since the special figure type is special figure 1, the processes of steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 1 information setting process and the special figure 1 variation, which will be described later. It is the same as the pattern setting process, and when the special figure hold information determination process is executed in step A164, the special figure type is special figure 2. Therefore, the processes of steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 2 information described later. It is the same as the setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the pre-reading stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory can be obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game processing (step S73a) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 game process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 game processing, the input of the large winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 1 (identification information that is variablely displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game) is displayed. Make the settings for. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in the big hit or the small hit (the big hit game state or the small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 2 variation display game) (step A1). .. When the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 is not performed (step A1; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning opening device 38 is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress (step A1; Y), and when the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is completed, the process proceeds to step A3. Special figure 1 If the game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to in the above is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game are monitored. Fig. 1 Setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations. Fig. 1 Performing normal processing (step A8).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1 are performed. 1 Perform the variable processing (step A9).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or the big hit of each big hit. Perform special figure 1 display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / inter-interval processing (step A11).

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. Performs the large winning opening opening processing (step A12), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing residual ball processing.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing is set, but it is the final round. For example, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, and the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 big hit end processing. Do it.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 big hit end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the predetermined large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the small hit middle processing are performed. Perform the small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) to set the information necessary for performing.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the small hit middle operation transition processing, the small hit end screen, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. Perform the small hit medium processing (step A16).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small hit end process (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. To do.

The small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game processing (step S73b) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 game processing, the input of the large winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 2 (identification information that is variablely displayed in the special figure 2 variable display game) is displayed. Make the settings for. In the special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is in the big hit or the small hit (the big hit game state or the small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game) (step A31). .. When the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 1 is not performed (step A31; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning opening device 38 is performed.

Next, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit in FIG. 1 is in progress (step A31; Y), and when the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is completed, the process proceeds to step A33. , Special figure 2 If the game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A33). The minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A34). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (step A35). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by "-1" (step A36), and the special figure 2 in RWM. A timer value for length variation (for example, 60,000 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, which is an area for storing the value of the game processing timer (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

On the other hand, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A35; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number. A table is set in a register (step A38), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the table (step A39). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step A47).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and the effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variation display game are monitored. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 2 Performing normal processing (step A48).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 2 are performed. 2 Perform the variable processing (step A49).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command can be set according to the type of big hit, or the big hit of each big hit. The special figure 2 display processing (step A50) for setting the fanfare time according to the winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / inter-interval processing (step A51).

In step A47, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. Performs the large winning opening opening processing (step A52), which performs processing such as setting information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is set, but it is the final round. For example, the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A53) for setting the time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 big hit end processing, and the like. Do it.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 big hit end process (step A54) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the predetermined large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the small hit middle processing are performed. Perform the small hit fanfare middle process (step A55) to set the information necessary for performing.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the small hit middle operation transition processing, the small hit end screen, the setting of the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. Perform the small hit medium processing (step A56).

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the small hit remaining ball processing (step A57) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end processing is performed.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step A58) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A59), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A60) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special symbol game process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in step A34, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A34; N), that is, when the time is not up or when the processing of step A37 is completed, step A59 is performed. Move to processing and perform subsequent processing.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start the fluctuation (that is, whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A251). In this determination, the game state is the period from the end of the fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 2 (the start of the process during display of the special figure 2) to the end of the hit operation (the big hit game state or the small hit game state). In the case of the above state, that is, when the special figure 2 is hit, it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot start the fluctuation, and when it is not in the relevant period, the special figure 1 is determined to be able to start the fluctuation.

Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 can start the fluctuation (step A251; Y), whether or not the left-handed instruction has been notified (that is, the left-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and then the right-handed instruction is given. It is determined (whether or not the notification command is not transmitted) (step A252). In step A252, if the left-handed instruction notification flag is set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, and if the left-handed instruction notification flag is not set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction notification has not been completed. It may be configured.

If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step A252; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A253), the effect command setting process (step A254) is performed, and the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step). A255).

When the left-handed instruction has been notified (step A252; Y) and when step A255 is completed, the process proceeds to step A256, and whether the number of holdings in FIG. 1 (first start storage number) is "0". It is determined whether or not (step A256). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0" (step A256; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure fluctuation display game is prepared (step A257), and an effect command is prepared. The setting process (step A258) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) is performed, the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step A260), and the effect command setting process (step A260) is performed. A261) is performed, and information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed) is set (information addition) in the special figure status area in the RWM (step A262), and the probability of the special figure change display game is set. It is determined whether or not the state is in high probability (step A263).

In the special figure status area, the information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) and the information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) are displayed. Each is an area to be stored independently, and the state indicated by the information set in this special figure status area is the special figure status. When step A262 is executed, the special figure status becomes one of "special figure 1 changing" and "special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing".

Further, in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259), a process of saving "1", which is a process number related to the special figure 1 changing process, in the special figure 1 game processing number area (steps A318 and A319 described later). A process of saving the changing flag in the fluctuation control flag area of the special figure 1 (step A322 described later), a process of setting the fluctuation time as the value of the game processing timer of the special figure 1 (steps A307 and A497 described later), and the like are performed. ..

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A263; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264; N), it is special. FIG. 1 Set the fluctuation check flag (step A265). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress is performed by the high-probability final fluctuation flag described later. That is, if the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress.

Then, when step A265 is completed, when it is determined that the probability is high (step A263; Y), and when it is determined that the final fluctuation is high probability (step A264; Y), the special figure is shown. 1 Process during fluctuation The transition setting process (step A266) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 cannot start fluctuation (step A251; N) and when the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" in step A256 (step A256; Y), the processing numbers are set. “0” is set (step A267), the processing number, that is, “0” is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special drawing 1 game processing number in the RWM (step A268), and the special drawing 1 game processing number is stored. 1 Normally end the process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of step A251 is affirmative and the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0", the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) or the like is executed. , Even if the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed), the special figure 1 variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the first start memory in the first start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the first start memory is displayed as variable based on the second start memory. It is a control means that can be executed at the same time as the game.

[Special Figure 2 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal processing (step A48) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start the fluctuation (that is, whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A271). In this determination, the game state is the period from the end of the fluctuation of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 1 (the start of the process during display of the special figure 1) to the end of the hit operation (the big hit game state or the small hit game state). In the case of the above state, that is, when the special figure 1 is hit, it is determined that the special figure 2 cannot start the fluctuation, and when it is not in the relevant period, the special figure 2 is determined to be able to start the fluctuation.

Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 can start the fluctuation (step A271; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A272). .. Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0" (step A272; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure fluctuation display game is prepared (step A273), and an effect command is prepared. The setting process (step A274) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) is performed, and the information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed) is set in the special figure status area in the RWM. (Information addition) (step A276), and it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A277).

Here, the states indicated by the information set in the special figure status area (that is, the special figure status) are "special figure 2 changing" and "special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing" when step A276 is executed. It becomes one of the states.

Further, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275), a process of saving "1", which is a process number related to the special figure 2 changing process, in the special figure 2 game process number area (steps A348 and A349 described later). A process of saving the changing flag in the fluctuation control flag area of the special figure 2 (step A352 described later), a process of setting the fluctuation time as the value of the game processing timer of the special figure 2 (steps A337 and A497 described later), and the like are performed. ..

For example, after executing step A275, a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared, then an effect command setting process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step A276 (that is, special figure 2). Also, in the usual processing, the decoration special figure hold number command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300).

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A277; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A278), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A278; N), it is special. FIG. 2 The fluctuation check flag is set (step A279).

Then, when step A279 is completed, when it is determined that the probability is high (step A277; Y), and when it is determined that the final fluctuation is high probability (step A278; Y), the special figure is shown. 2 Processing during fluctuation The transition setting processing (step A280) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A272; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number is "0" (step A281), and the special figure 1 hold number is When it is determined that it is "0" (step A281; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (step A282). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step A282; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (step A283), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (step A283; N). ) Sets the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A284). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step A285), and the effect command setting process (step A286) is performed. It should be noted that the prepared command (here, the customer waiting demo command) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the effect command setting process is performed.

Then, when step A286 is completed, when it is determined that the special figure 2 cannot start fluctuation (step A271; N), and when the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (step A281; N), the special figure 1 is special. When FIG. 1 is changing (step A282; Y) and when the customer waiting demo has been started (step A283; Y), "0" is set as the processing number (step A287), and the RWM The processing number, that is, “0” is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special drawing 2 game processing number (step A288), and the special drawing 2 normal processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of step A271 is affirmative and the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275) or the like is executed. , Even if the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed), the special figure 2 variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variable display based on the first start memory. It is a control means that can be executed at the same time as the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A259) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 27 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is set (step A301), and the first special figure change display game is started. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A302) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A303) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure 1 information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1. This is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set by performing the special figure 1 information setting process (step A304). Prepare the setting information table (step A305). After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A306) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step A307) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is in the high probability (step A308).

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A308; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309; N), it is special. It is determined whether or not FIG. 2 is changing (special figure 2 changing display game is being executed) (step A310). When the special figure 2 is changing (step A310; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is “0” (step A311). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A311; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312). FIG. 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is not, for example, "4" or more (step A312; N), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is calculated (step A313).

The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set in the fluctuation start information setting process of step A337 described later when the special figure 2 game processing timer is in a state of a time value (for example, 60,000 ms) sufficient within the 2-byte range. It is set to "0" (see, for example, step A500 below).

Further, the variation time of the special figure 2 (execution time of the variation display game of the special figure 2) can be calculated from the value of the game processing timer of the special figure 2 (value in the game processing timer area of the special figure 2). Specifically, in step A313, the result of multiplying the length variation timer value (for example, 60,000 ms) saved in step A37 by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is multiplied by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer, and the special figure 2 game processing at that time is performed. By adding the values in the timer area, the remaining fluctuation time in Special Figure 2 can be calculated.

Further, when the timer value for long fluctuation is, for example, 60,000 msec (= 60 seconds), the value of the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more, which means that the remaining fluctuation time in special figure 2 is 240. It is a second (= 4 × 60 seconds) or more, which is longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the special figure 1. In that case, it is not necessary to execute steps A315 and A316 described later, so a step for determining it. A312 is provided. Therefore, the numerical value "4" in step A312 is a numerical value for preliminarily determining whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the maximum fluctuation time of the special figure 1 by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer. It's just one example.

Next, when step A313 is completed and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311; Y), the process proceeds to step A314, and special figure 1 to be started from now on. When the fluctuation time of (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A306) is the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 currently being changed (calculation result of step A313 or the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is zero). It is determined whether or not the time is shorter than the special time (time determined by the value of the game processing timer in FIG. 2) (step A314).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A314; N), a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer is prepared (step A315). ), The effect command setting process (step A316) is performed.

Next, when the probability is high (step A308; Y), the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A309; Y), and the special figure 2 is not changing (step A310; N), the special figure 2 game. When the number of repetitions of the processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312; Y), when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A314; Y), and step A316. When is completed, the process proceeds to step A317 (FIG. 27).

When the process proceeds to step A317, the high probability fluctuation frequency update process (step A317) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A318), and the special figure 1 game process number is stored in the RWM. The processing number, that is, "1" is saved in the game processing number area (step A319), and the customer waiting demo flag area, which is an area for setting the customer waiting demo flag area in the RWM, is cleared (step A320). After that, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation (the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A321), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM (step A321). Step A322), save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the symbol display unit 53 of the special figure 1) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area of the RWM (step A323), and specialize the RWM. FIG. 1 The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during fluctuation (step A324), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated. The reason why "0" is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 1 in step A324 is to start the change display of the special figure 1 from the blank symbol.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A275) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 29 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is set (step A331), and the second special figure change display game is executed. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A332) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure 2 information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2. The special figure 2 variation pattern is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is performed by performing the special figure 2 information setting process (step A334). The setting information table is prepared (step A335). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step A337) is performed to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is in the high probability (step A338).

Then, when it is not in the high probability (step A338; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A339), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A339; N), it is special. It is determined whether or not FIG. 1 is changing (special figure 1 changing display game is being executed) (step A340). When the special figure 1 is changing (step A340; Y), the remaining change time of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A343). The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 can be calculated from the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area).

Next, when step A343 is completed, the process proceeds to step A344, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 to be started from now on (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A336) of the special figure 1 which is currently changing. It is determined whether or not it is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (calculation result of step A343) (step A344).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (step A344; N), a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer is prepared (step A345). ), The effect command setting process (step A346) is performed.

Next, when the probability is high (step A338; Y), the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A339; Y), and the special figure 1 is not changing (step A340; N), the special figure 2 is shown. When the fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time in FIG. 1 (step A344; Y), and when step A346 is completed, the process proceeds to step A347 (FIG. 29).

When the process shifts to step A347, the high probability fluctuation frequency update process (step A347) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A348), and the special figure 2 game process number is stored in the special figure 2 in the RWM. The processing number, that is, "1" is saved in the game processing number area (step A349), and the customer waiting demo flag area, which is an area for setting the customer waiting demo flag area in the RWM, is cleared (step A350). After that, the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the signal during the change of the special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM (step A351). Step A352), save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the symbol display unit 54 in the special figure 2) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area of the RWM (step A353), and specialize the RWM. FIG. 2 The initial value (for example, “0” corresponding to the blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during fluctuation (step A354), and the special FIG. 2 fluctuation start process is terminated. The reason why "0" is saved in the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 2 in step A354 is to start the change display of the special figure 2 from the blank symbol.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A307 and A337) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. 30 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the variation start information setting process of the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the variation start information setting process of the first embodiment.

In the variation start information setting process, first, the information in the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 is cleared. That is, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A491), and when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A491; Y), the variation pattern random number 1 and the variation pattern random number of the special figure 1 are being set. 2 and the information (for the holding ball 1) of the random number storage area (for the holding ball 1) of the fluctuation pattern random number 3 are cleared (step A491a). When the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A491; N), the information in the random number storage area of the variable pattern random number 1, the variable pattern random number 2, and the variable pattern random number 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step). A491b).

Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the special figure game processing timer area for the added value (that is, the special figure 1 game processing timer area during the information setting of the special figure 1). While the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area) (step A497).

Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A498), and when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A498; N), it is determined whether or not the long variation of the special figure 2 is started (step). A499), if it is not the start of the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 (step A499; N), the "repeated number of times of the special figure 2 game processing timer is stored in the RWM)" Save "0" (step A500).

On the other hand, when the long fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (step A499; Y), "9" is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A501). Then, when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A498; Y), when the processing of steps A500 and A501 is completed, the process proceeds to step A502.

It should be noted that the number of repetitions (the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer) is set for the length variation of the special figure 2 in order to make the variation of the time insufficient by the 2-byte special figure game processing timer. Further, when, for example, 60,000 ms is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step A497 as the addition result of step A496, and "9" is saved as the number of repetitions in step A501, the timer interrupt processing (step A33 described above) saves. The value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is subtracted, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions of the special figure game processing timer is decremented by 1 in the above-mentioned step A36, and further to the special figure 2 game processing timer area in the above-mentioned step A37. 60,000 ms is set. Therefore, in this case, as a result, the total variation time of FIG. 2 is 60,000 ms × 10 in this embodiment, which is a variation time of 10 minutes. Actually, since it is a timer interrupt of 4 ms, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, the case where it can be expressed by multiplication by 60 seconds is explained as an example.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A502, the variation command data (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A502), and the variation command data (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A503). ), Perform the effect command setting process (step A504).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the effect command setting process, the prepared command data (MODE and ACTION) are written to the effect serial transmission buffer unless the effect serial transmission buffer is full. As a result, the effect command consisting of the prepared command data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. The same applies when the effect command setting process is executed by being called in another step. Further, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like the effect command, but a larger byte configuration may be used. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a multi-byte configuration may be used.

Next, when step A504 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A505), and if the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A505; Y), the number of reserved special figures 1 is set. Is updated by "-1" (step A506), the address of the random number storage area of Special Figure 1 is set, the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507), and the information of the free area after the shift is cleared. (Step A508), the variation start information setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A505; N), the number of reserved special figures 2 is updated by "-1" (step A506a), and the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 is set. The random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507a), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A508a), and the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the above-mentioned effect command setting process, and the effect control device 300 receives the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. The detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are set according to the determined fluctuation pattern, and the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is executed. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. Examples include variable commands containing information about patterns (sometimes referred to as variable pattern commands), and for example, each effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a predetermined order as shown in the flowchart of the present embodiment. ..

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high-probability fluctuation number update processing (steps A317 and A347) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the high probability fluctuation number update process of the first embodiment.

In the high probability fluctuation frequency update process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is in high probability (step A551), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step A551; N). , Ends the high probability fluctuation count update process.

When one of the types of the special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is in the big hit gaming state, the hit probability of the other variable display game is always controlled to a low probability, but one of them is small. In the case of a hit, the other may be in high probability.

When the probability is high (step A551; Y), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high-probability state is updated by "-1" (step A552), and the high-probability fluctuation is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times is "0" (step A553).

If the number of high-probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A553; N), the high-probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is "0" (step A553; Y), the signal relating to the high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step A555). The signal relating to the high probability end is a signal that turns off the big hit 2 signal.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the high probability & time reduction (high probability & no time reduction, or high probability & time reduction) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A556). The signals related to the end of high probability & time reduction are a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal. A signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are included. Further, even in the high probability of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the normal figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step A557), the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A559), and the symbol that starts to fluctuate (special). The high-probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to FIG. 1 or special figure 2) is set (step A560), and the high-probability fluctuation number update process is terminated.

The high-probability final fluctuation flag includes information that can determine the type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure fluctuation display game that is the high-probability final fluctuation. In addition, in the high-probability final fluctuation, the internal probability becomes low at the start of the fluctuation, so even if it is currently in the low probability, the information to show that the fluctuation started in the high probability is this high. Probability final fluctuation flag. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, in the high-probability final fluctuation, the probability state (setting state in the game control device 100) of the target special figure is returned to the low probability at the start of the fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that when the game ball wins a prize at the starting opening during the final round of the special figure change in the high probability state, the winning judgment for the starting prize is determined with a high probability.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG. 33 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during the change in FIG. 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during the change in FIG. 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by "+1" (step A571), and a command from the decorative special figure 1 command area (decorative special figure 1 including information on the stop symbol for special figure 1) is performed. The command) is loaded, prepared (step A572), and the effect command setting process (step A573) is performed.

Next, a decorative special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A574), an effect command setting process (step A575) is performed, and a high probability final is performed depending on the state of the high probability final fluctuation flag. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation (step A576). Then, when the final fluctuation is not high probability (step A576; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is set to the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in this special figure 1 variation display game. When it is set as the stop display time of (step A577) and has a high probability final fluctuation (step A576; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation is set as the stop display time of this special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The setting is made (step A578), and the process proceeds to step A579. Here, the stop display time set in steps A577 and A578 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A579.

To give an example of the display time of the special figure 1, in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. In some cases, 2000 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 136 ms is set as the display time. Further, the display time of the high probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A579 (FIG. 34), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 1 variable display game is out of order based on the information determined and set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process. (Step A579), if it is out of alignment (step A579; Y), the process proceeds to step A594, and if it is not out of alignment (step A579; N), special figure 2 is currently changing (special figure 2 variable display game is being executed). It is determined whether or not there is (step A580).

It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 2 is changing is determined by any of the information in the special figure 2 game processing number area, the information in the special figure status area, and the information in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. Can be done. That is, it may be determined that the game is changing if "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, or it is determined that the game is changing if the special figure 2 changing state is set in the special figure status area. It may be configured, or it may be determined that it is changing if the changing flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 2, or it may be determined by a combination of these conditions.

When the special figure 2 is also changing (step A580; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is being executed (step A581), and the special figure 2 display process is not being executed. In the case (step A581; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by "+1" (step A582).

Next, when step A582 is completed and when the process during display of special figure 2 is being executed (step A581; Y), the display time of this special figure 1 (time set in step A577 or the like) is set. For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 2 (step A583), and the display time of the special figure 2 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A584). By the processing of steps A583 and A584, if the special figure 2 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 2 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of the special figure 2 is basically extended, but in some cases, it may be shortened.

After that, a command (decorative special figure 2 command including information on the stop symbol for special figure 2) is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area, prepared (step A585), and the effect command setting process (step A586) is performed. Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A587), the effect command setting process (step A588) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step). Perform A589).

According to the processing of steps A579 to A589 described above, if the current special figure 1 variable display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure being changed at the same time. The fluctuation display of 2 will be forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A589 is completed and when special figure 2 is not changing (step A580; N), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step A590). , It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game of this time is a small hit (step A591).

Then, in the case of a big hit and not a small hit (step A591; N), information (number of special figure 1 rounds) is obtained from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area in order to control the big hit game after the special figure 1 fluctuation ends. Load the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information) that determines the upper limit value, save it in the round number upper limit value information area (step A592), load the information from the special figure 1 big winning opening opening information area, and open the big winning opening. Save in the information area (step A593).

Next, when the current special figure 1 variable display game is out of order (step A579; Y) and when the current special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (step A591; Y), step A593 is completed. If so, the process proceeds to step A594. When the process proceeds to step A594, information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A594), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step). A595) is performed to end the processing during the change in Special Figure 1. In the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the first start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as a means for ending the variable display game based on the second start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (step A49) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special FIG. 2 variable processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 36 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special FIG. 2 variable processing according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by "+1" (step A601), and a command from the decorative special figure 2 command area (decorative special figure 2 including information on the stop symbol for special figure 2) is performed. The command) is loaded, prepared (step A602), and the effect command setting process (step A603) is performed.

Next, a decorative special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A604), an effect command setting process (step A605) is performed, and a high probability final is performed depending on the state of the high probability final fluctuation flag. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation (step A606). Then, when the final fluctuation is not high probability (step A606; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is set to the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in this special figure 2 variation display game. When it is set as the stop display time of (step A607) and has a high probability final fluctuation (step A606; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation is set as the stop display time of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game. The setting is made (step A608), and the process proceeds to step A609. Here, the stop display time set in steps A607 and A608 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, for example, in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A609.

To give an example of the display time of the special figure 2, in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. Even if there is, 600 ms is set as the display time, and 600 ms is set as the display time even when the stop symbol pattern is the small hit symbol pattern. Further, the display time of the high probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms. In the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the out-of-stop symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set for each.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A609 (FIG. 36), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 2 variation display game is out of order based on the information determined and set by the jackpot flag 2 setting process. (Step A609), if it is out of alignment (step A609; Y), the process proceeds to step A624, and if it is not out of alignment (step A609; N), special figure 1 is currently changing (special figure 2 variable display game is being executed). It is determined whether or not there is (step A610).

It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 1 is changing is determined by any one of the information in the special figure 1 game processing number area, the information in the special figure status area, and the information in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. Can be done. That is, if "1" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area, it may be determined that the game is changing, or if the special figure 1 status area is set to change, it is determined that the game is changing. It may be configured, or it may be determined that it is changing if the changing flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 1, or it may be determined by a combination of these conditions.

When the special figure 1 is also changing (step A610; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 display process is being executed (step A611), and the special figure 1 display process is not being executed. In the case (step A611; N), the number of symbol confirmation counts is updated by "+1" (step A612).

Next, when step A612 is completed and when the process during display of special figure 1 is being executed (step A611; Y), the display time of this special figure 2 (time set in step A607 or the like) is set. For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 1 (step A613), and the display time of the special figure 1 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A614). By the processing of steps A613 and A614, if the special figure 1 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 1 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of the special figure 1 is basically extended, but in some cases, it may be shortened.

After that, a command (decorative special figure 1 command including information on the stop symbol for special figure 1) is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepared (step A615), and the effect command setting process (step A616) is performed. Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A617), the effect command setting process (step A618) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step) is performed. Perform A619).

According to the processing of steps A609 to A619 described above, if the current special figure 2 variable display game for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure being changed at the same time. The fluctuation display of 1 will be forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A619 is completed and when special figure 1 is not changing (step A610; N), a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step A620). , It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game of this time is a small hit (step A621).

Then, in the case of a big hit and not a small hit (step A621; N), information (number of special figure 2 rounds) is obtained from the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area in order to control the big hit game after the special figure 2 fluctuation ends. Load the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information) that determines the upper limit value, save it in the round number upper limit value information area (step A622), load the information from the special figure 2 big winning opening opening information area, and open the big winning opening. Save in the information area (step A623).

Next, when the current special figure 2 variation display game is out of order (step A609; Y) and when the current special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit (step A621; Y), step A623 is completed. If so, the process proceeds to step A624. When shifting to step A624, information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A624), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step). Perform A625) to end the process during change in Special Figure 2. In the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, a predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variable display game based on the second start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as a means for ending the variable display game based on the first start memory being executed at the same time.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step A595) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 1 display process, is set as the process number (step A631), and the process is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Save the number or "2" (step A632).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in Special Figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A633). The signal relating to the end of the change in the special figure 1 is a signal for turning off the signal during the change in the special symbol 1.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A634), special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A625) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 2 display process, is set as the process number (step A641), and the process is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A642).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A643). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 2 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A644), special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 1 Displaying process Transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step A619) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that started the fluctuation is a hit, the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 2 forcibly ends the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that has been changing at the same time. It is a process to make it. That is, it is a process for setting information when it is forcibly stopped by hitting the other symbol.

In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 1 display process, is set as the process number (step A651), and the process is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Save the number or "2" (step A652).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in Special Figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A653). The signal relating to the end of the change in the special figure 1 is a signal for turning off the signal during the change in the special symbol 1.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A654), the out-of-order stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (the area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM) (step A655). It should be noted that, in this stop symbol pattern area, usually, for the special figure 1 variation display game being executed, a predetermined stop symbol pattern (depending on the extracted random number, a hit stop symbol pattern) has already been set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. (In some cases) is saved, but here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the out-of-order stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in steps A656 to 661 after this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset in order to forcibly terminate the data once it is out of order.

Next, the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (the area for storing the special figure 1 round number upper limit information in RWM) is cleared (step A656), and the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (special figure in RWM) is cleared. Clear (step A657) (step A657), and save the information that is out of the small hit flag 1 area (step A658). The deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A659). Here, the small hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 1 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 1, and the information on whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit or whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit. It is an area of RWM that stores the information, and the information is normally set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, and the information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step A660), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A661), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step A589) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that started the fluctuation is a hit, the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 2 forcibly ends the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been changing at the same time. It is a process to make it. That is, it is a process for setting information when it is forcibly stopped by hitting the other symbol.

In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 2 display process, is set as the process number (step A671), and the process is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save the number or "2" (step A672).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A673). The signal relating to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the signal during the special symbol 2 fluctuation.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area ( Step A674), the out-of-order stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (the area for storing the stop symbol pattern in the RWM) (step A675). It should be noted that, in this stop symbol pattern area, usually, for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed, a predetermined stop symbol pattern (depending on the extracted random number, a hit stop symbol pattern) has already been set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. (In some cases) is saved, but here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the out-of-order stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in steps A676 to 681 after this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset in order to forcibly terminate the data once it is out of order.

Next, the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (the area for storing the special figure 2 round number upper limit information in RWM) is cleared (step A676), and the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (special figure in RWM) is cleared. Clear (step A677) the area for storing the two major winning opening opening information, and save the information that is out of the small hit flag 2 area (step A678). The deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A679). Here, the small hit flag 2 area and the big hit flag 2 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 2, and the information on whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or whether or not the special figure 2 is a big hit. It is an area of RWM that stores each of the information, and the information is normally set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and the information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (step A680), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A681), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, the details of the process during display of the special figure 1 (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 41, 42, and 43. FIG. 41 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 42 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 1 of the first embodiment.

In the process of displaying the special figure 1, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information of the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM is displayed. Clear (step A702).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A703), and the information in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, when it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A705) and it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1) is determined. The signal related to the start of the jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A706), the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation release command is prepared (step A707), the effect command setting process (step A708) is performed, and the number of rounds is performed. The upper limit table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for turning on the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a signal for turning on the signal for one special symbol. include.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, "16" or "4", or the like, for example. (There may be "8" or "2") is acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit value area (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process (step A715) is performed. ..

Next, the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A716, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R bumping probability, turned on if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in high probability, and turned off if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in low probability. Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R bumping probability, turned off if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in high probability, and turned on if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in low probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step A717), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A717). Step A718).

The information in the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A720), the fraudulent monitoring period out-of-fraud flag is saved in the large winning opening fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step A721), and the process proceeds to step A724.

When shifting to step A724, 3 is set as the processing number (step A724), the processing number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step A725), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step). Perform A726) and end the processing during display of special figure 1.

On the other hand, in step A705, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A705; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727), and the small hit flag 1 is small. When it is determined that it is a hit (step A727; Y), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A728).

Then, when it is determined in step A728 that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A728; Y), the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game and the special map fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (step A728; Y). A probability information command related to the information to be set as (low probability state) is prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting process (step A730) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A731), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A732). In step A732, assuming a mode in which the right-handed instruction notification is performed in the high-probability state, the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared because the high-probability final fluctuation is determined and the high-probability state is completed. Illustrate. However, when the present embodiment is an embodiment in which the right-handed instruction is not notified in the high-probability state, step A732 is deleted (or the left-handed instruction is notified in the high-probability state and the left-handed instruction is notified in step A732. There may be a configuration in which the flag is cleared).

Next, when step A732 is completed and when the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A728; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A733), and an effect command setting process (step) is performed. Perform A734). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A735), and the effect command setting process (step A736) is prepared. Is performed, and it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state (for example, a state in which the fanfare support state, the big hit, or the special mode is not performed) in which the game state should be left-handed (step A737).

When it is determined in step A737 that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A737; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A739), and the process proceeds to step A743.

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A737; N), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A740). The signal related to the right-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A741), and the process proceeds to step A743.

When the process proceeds to step A743, the information in the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A743), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A744), and the process proceeds to step A747. ..

When the process shifts to step A747, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step A747) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process ends. In the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, the process of saving "7" as the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area, and the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 msec) in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. ) Is saved.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A727 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A748).
Then, when it is determined in step A748 that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A748; Y), the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game and the special map fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (step A748; Y). A probability information command related to the information to be set as (low probability state) is prepared (step A749), and the effect command setting process (step A750) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A751), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A752), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit (a big hit or a small hit) (step A753). Note that step A752 is only an example assuming a mode in which right-handed instruction notification is performed in a high probability state, as in step A732 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation display game is not hit (step A753; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A753; N). In step A754), in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A755). In this embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display game is hit (big hit or small hit), right-handed aiming at the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) opened at that time. If the special figure 2 is hit (step A753; Y), the game passes through steps A754 and A755 and proceeds to step A756. Further, when step A755 is completed, the process proceeds to step A756.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A756, the information indicating that the special figure 1 change in the special figure status area in the RWM is being changed (the special figure 1 change display game is being executed) is cleared (information subtraction) (step A756), and the special figure 1 game is performed. The processing number, that is, "0", which is normally related to the special figure 1 processing, is saved in the processing number area (step A757), and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated. When step A756 is executed, the special figure status is either a state in which only the special figure 2 is changing, or a state in which neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, the details of the process during display of the special figure 2 (step A50) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 44, 45, and 46. FIG. 44 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 45 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram (No. 3) showing a flowchart of the process during display of the special figure 2 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A761), and the information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM is displayed. Clear (step A762).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A763), and the information in the jackpot flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step A764). Then, when it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A765) and it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step A765; Y), the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2) is determined. The signal related to the start of the jackpot) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A766), the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation release command is prepared (step A767), the effect command setting process (step A768) is performed, and the number of rounds is performed. The upper limit table is set (step A769). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit includes a signal for turning on the signal during operation of the condition device, a signal for turning on the signal for turning on the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a signal for turning on the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. include.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A769), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, "16" or "4", or the like, for example. (There may be "8" or "2") is acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit value area (step A770). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A771).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A772), and the effect command setting process (step A773) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A774), and the effect command setting process (step A775) is performed. ..

Next, the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A776). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A776, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. In addition, each on / off is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R bumping probability, turned on if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in high probability, and turned off if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in low probability. Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned on if it is a jackpot other than 2R bumping probability, turned off if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in high probability, and turned on if it is a 2R bumping jackpot in low probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step A777), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A777). Step A778).

The information in the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A780), the fraudulent monitoring period out-of-fraud flag is saved in the large winning opening fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step A781), and the process proceeds to step A784.

When shifting to step A784, 3 is set as the processing number (step A784), the processing number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step A785), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step). A786) is performed, and the processing during display of special figure 2 is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A765, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A765; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787), and the small hit flag 2 is small. When it is determined that it is a hit (step A787; Y), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A788).

Then, when it is determined in step A788 that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A788; Y), the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game and the special map fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (step A788; Y). A probability information command related to the information to be set as (low probability state) is prepared (step A789), and the effect command setting process (step A790) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A791), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A792). In step A792, assuming a mode in which the right-handed instruction notification is performed in the high-probability state, the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared because the high-probability final fluctuation is determined and the high-probability state is completed. Illustrate. However, when the present embodiment is an embodiment in which the right-handed instruction is not notified in the high-probability state, step A792 is deleted (or the left-handed instruction is notified in the high-probability state and the left-handed instruction is notified in step A792. There may be a configuration in which the flag is cleared).

Next, when step A792 is completed and when the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A788; N), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A793), and an effect command setting process (step A793) is performed. Perform A794). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A795), and the effect command setting process (step A796) is prepared. Is performed, and it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state (for example, a state in which the fanfare support state, the big hit, or the special mode is not performed) in which the game state should be left-handed (step A797).

When it is determined in step A797 that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A797; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A798). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the launch position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A799), and the process proceeds to step A803.

When the process proceeds to step A803, the information in the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A803), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A804), and the process proceeds to step A807. ..

When the process shifts to step A807, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step A807) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process ends. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, the process of saving "7" as the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area, and the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 msec) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. ) Is saved.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A787 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A787; N), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A808).
Then, when it is determined in step A808 that the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (step A808; Y), the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game and the special map fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (step A808; Y). A probability information command related to the information to be set as (low probability state) is prepared (step A809), and the effect command setting process (step A810) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A811), and the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step). A812), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step A813). It should be noted that step A812 is merely an example assuming a mode in which right-handed instruction notification is performed in a high probability state, as in step A792 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (step A813; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A813; N). In step A814), in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A815). In this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, a right-handed hit should be made aiming at the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) opened at that time. When the special figure 1 is a big hit (step A813; Y), the game passes through steps A814 and A815 and proceeds to step A816. Further, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 is not in the big hit (step A813; N) (including the case where the special figure 1 is in the small hit), the process proceeds to step A816 after executing steps A814 and A815. However, the processing content related to such right-handed and left-handed hits varies depending on the board configuration of the gaming machine and the game characteristics, and is only an example. Also, when step A815 is completed, the process proceeds to step A816.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A816, the information indicating that the special figure 2 change in the special figure status area in the RWM is being changed (the special figure 2 change display game is being executed) is cleared (information subtraction) (step A816), and the special figure 2 game is performed. The processing number, that is, "0", which is normally related to the special figure 2 processing, is saved in the processing number area (step A817), and the processing being displayed in the special figure 2 is terminated. When step A816 is executed, the special figure status is either a state in which only the special figure 1 is changing or a state in which neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S78) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 48 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S72), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S67), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S76), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S77) are used. Based on this, the process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and setting it in the output buffer is performed.

In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error status and security status, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and the main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame The on-data of the open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the main body frame opening error is output as external information and a test signal.

On the other hand, when neither the glass frame opening error nor the main body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", "-1" is updated. (Step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78).

When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized in the above-mentioned main process and the initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the security signal control timer, until the security signal control timer times out. The on-data of the security signal is output as external information.

Next, the magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step C81; Y), the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step C82; Y), and the grand prize opening fraud is occurring (step C83; Y). Or, when an abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step C84; Y) in FIG. 2, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is output as a test signal. Save to the data area (step C86). Similarly, even when an illegal operation is occurring, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86) It may be configured.

On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, the panel radio wave fraud, the frame radio wave fraud, the general power fraud, the big prize opening fraud, or the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), the switch error 1 or It is determined whether or not the switch abnormality of the switch abnormality 2 is occurring (step C87), and if no switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; N), the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is output as a test signal. Save to the data area (step C88).

Then, when any of the switch abnormalities is occurring (step C87; Y), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C86). Here, the abnormal variation and the switch abnormality in FIG. 2 are abnormalities monitored by the winning opening switch / status monitoring process in the timer interrupt process.

Next, after completing steps C86 or C88, in the external information editing process, the winning signal (starting port 1 signal) of the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, which is the starting winning opening of FIG. 1, the normal variable winning device 37) is used. ) Is performed in the start port 1 signal editing process (step C89), and the winning signal (starting port 2 signal) of the starting port 2 (starting winning port 92, which is the starting winning port in FIG. 2) is edited. The signal editing process (step C90) is performed. Subsequently, the main prize ball signal editing process (step C91) for editing the main prize ball signal related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the symbol confirmation number signal is obtained based on the symbol confirmation number output number (symbol confirmation number signal output number). The symbol determination number signal editing process (step C92) for editing is performed, and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main processing]
Next, the main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit disables interrupts.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initial settings of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs the initial setting of VDP312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits interrupts.

[Step D15] The control unit permits the generation of display data. That is, the control unit permits the display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a sland function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the sland function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit is an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the effect control device 300)). ) Saves the initial value when the power is turned on.

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes the effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and enter button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of detecting the input of the effect button in the effect button input process or in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall / player setting mode process. The hall / player setting mode process is a process for accepting operations such as setting a range in which the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 can be changed, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once in each control cycle of the main process by using, for example, the land function. Since the land function generates a random number based on the specified generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the land function. A counter that increments by "1", such as the main board (game control device 100), may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit executes the effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets commands in a table shape in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process for setting that all commands for the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process have been prepared.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26 if it is the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sink interrupt). It is the timing to arrive at the target interval. The V blank interrupt is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the frame switching timing cycle is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or less than 1/30 second. Frame switching may be performed at intervals.

By the frame switching timing determination processing, the subsequent processing (steps D26 to D30, and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed at this frame switching timing for each processing cycle. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

[Step D26] The control unit instructs VDP312 to draw a screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table shape and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes the sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes the decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs and the like such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18.
[Step D29] The control unit executes the movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process for controlling a movable body (for example, a board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes the launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and also produces a special map rotation state (the number of special map fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of balls to be rented)). It is a process to correct the mode of.

[Step D31] The control unit executes the information disclosure process. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing performance information related to game performance to a player.
The control unit returns to step D18 after executing step D31, and thereafter repeatedly executes the processes of steps D18 to D31. That is, steps D18 to D31 constitute a loop process (sometimes referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above process cycle after the effect control device 300 is started.

The control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect of the screen, and signals and data (particularly various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are used. The process of actually outputting the drive control signal, etc. to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command check process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The reception command (effect command) is configured to include MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the effect command is sent from the game control device (main board) 100 to the effect control device 300. Are transmitted in sequence. In the following, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

Further, the process of receiving a command from the main board is performed by "command reception interrupt processing" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user. All you have to do is take it out of the buffer, but in the above "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking whether the loaded command data is abnormal, the command is concerned. The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by "1" by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, the term "storing" simply means that the device is readable and stored in a predetermined storage area for use in the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is composed of, for example, a storage area in RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of CPU 311. The capacity of the command buffer may be greater than or equal to the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of command receptions. The command reception counter is set in the RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle in step D43, the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time for one cycle of the above-mentioned processing cycle) is stored.

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the command reception number is "0 (zero)", and if the command reception number is not "0", the process proceeds to step D43, and the command reception number is "0". If so, the received command check process is terminated. In the present application, “loading” the data in the control process as in step D41 means taking out the data from the RAM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of this example).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
If A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of commands received, "A = B" immediately after the execution of step D41. Immediately after the execution of step D43, "A = AB = 0" is a normal movement, but in the embodiment of this example, the effect control device 300 is a command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) 100. Is given the highest priority without disabling interrupts, so there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to "A ← 0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be deviated. Therefore, in step D43, the subtraction process of "AB" is performed. I'm doing it. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to "A ← 0".

[Step D44] The control unit inputs the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, hereinafter may be simply referred to as a command buffer) (that is, the command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in RAM 322 or RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO format (first-in, first-out format) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the command read index value, which is a pointer for reading the command buffer, is updated to be increased by "1" in the range of "0" to "31", for example. Do it. The range of "0" to "31" here corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, "32").

[Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not step D44 and step D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the copy of the command for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copy is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (that is, reads) the contents of the command area (data stored first among the data not yet read in the command area, that is, data to be read next). do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes the received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process for analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the command this time). The received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands has not been completed, and ends the received command check process when the analysis is completed.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a received command analysis process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit separately stores the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process in MODE and the lower byte in ACT. In the case of a variable system command that commands a fluctuation pattern of a special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. It is a thing.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of MODE separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D53 when the MODE value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the MODE value is not in the normal range. It should be noted that the value of MODE may not be defined and may not be used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D52 that it is not in the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT value is not in the normal range.

Further, in step D53, it is determined as follows, for example, whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of the ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and in step D53, they are separated within the range of the upper limit to the lower limit. It is checked whether the value of the ACT that has been set is within, and if it is within the range, it is determined that the range is normal (at this point, the toothlessness check described later has not been performed).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the separated ACT value is the correct combination with respect to the separated MODE value. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT values are the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process when the ACT values are not the correct combination. Whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be determined by using, for example, a match check table. In the match check table, all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the start address, and are provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination is executed including the tooth omission check of whether or not the ACT value is a normal combination for MODE. For one MODE, there are multiple valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously and values that are missing teeth), so the command Is a valid value. Since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if they match any of them.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. ..

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 and the like described later). Further, a variable command (sometimes referred to as a variable command or a variable pattern command) is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of this variable command can take is the variable command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes the jackpot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. .. The jackpot command is a command that commands an operation related to the jackpot production (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.), and the range that the data of this jackpot command can take is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol system command range. The control unit executes symbol-based command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol-based command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol-based command range. .. A symbol command (sometimes called a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for commanding information about a special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be), and this symbol command. The range that can be taken by the data is the design command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. The control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the single-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range. .. In addition, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / invalid commands, model specification commands, and the like. The range that the data of this one-shot command can take is the one-shot command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol system command range. The control unit executes look-ahead symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range (step D64), and steps when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead symbol command range. Proceed to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead fluctuation system command range. The control unit executes look-ahead variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the look-ahead variable command range (step D66), and receives it when the MODE data is not within the look-ahead variable command range. End the command analysis process.

The look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are commands for pre-reading effect. When any of the processes of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 is completed, the received command analysis process is completed.

Here, the pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to the start winning memory (holding of the starting winning memory, or simply holding) in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed. In order to notify the player in advance whether or not the game will be a big hit (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) when it is executed after that, the start winning memory is held and displayed in an unusual manner. It is a production such as. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is a game at the time of the start winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

Next, the information disclosure function that makes it possible to perceive the setting information without excessively inciting gambling will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 67. First, the outline of the information disclosure function will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of an outline of the information disclosure function of the first embodiment.

The game control device 100 includes a set value change switch (set value change SW) 126, and makes it possible to change the set value of the game performance. The set value is from "0" to "5", and the hit probability of the special figure game can be changed in 6 stages. Further, the game control device 100 includes a probability setting value display device 136, and the set value set by using the set value change switch 126 can be confirmed by displaying numerical values from "0" to "5".

Since the game control device 100 is provided with the set value change switch 126 and the probability set value display device 136 on the game control board, and the game control device 100 is provided on the back surface side of the front frame 12 of the game machine 10, the game is in progress. There is virtually no opportunity to be observed by the player. Further, the game control device 100 transmits various commands to the effect control device 300, but does not include information on the set value in the various commands and transmit the effect to the effect control device 300. As a result, the gaming machine 10 eliminates the opportunity to confirm the set value other than the game control device 100, and suppresses the leakage of the set value.

The effect control device 300 does not receive a command including information about the set value from the game control device 100, but receives various commands accompanying the progress of the game according to the set value. The effect control device 300 stores the game history in the FeRAM 323 based on various received commands. Since the FeRAM 323 is a non-volatile storage unit, it is possible to accumulate a game history for a predetermined period without losing it even if the power is turned off. The effect control device 300 calculates the game performance from the accumulated game history.

The effect control device 300 includes a push button 25. The push button 25 is an operation unit capable of accepting an operation input, and includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. Here, the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of the detection signal of the touch sensor and the detection signal of the push button SW. For example, the state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. Further, the state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b. Hereinafter, the option setting unit 25 is referred to as a push button or a PB (Push Button). The effect control device 300 can allow the player to select the display content of the performance information related to the game performance of the gaming machine 10 or select the notification opportunity of the performance information by the operation input by the push button 25.

The effect control device 300 can display the calculated performance information on the display device 41 with the default display content or the selected display content. Further, the effect control device 300 can display the calculated performance information on the display device 41 at the default notification opportunity or the selected notification opportunity. The display device 41 is a form of the notification means, and the effect control device 300 is a other effect means (for example, speakers 19a, 19b, a frame decoration device 18, a board decoration device 46, a board effect device 44, and the like). A sub-display device, LED, etc.) can be used as the notification means.

As a result, the effect control device 300 can disclose the performance information as the actual value according to the operation of the gaming machine 10, and as a result, the setting information can be perceived. Further, since the effect control device 300 does not directly disclose the information regarding the set value to the player, the gambling property is not excessively aggravated. Further, since the effect control device 300 does not receive the information regarding the set value from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 does not leak the set value to the outside. In this way, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to perceive the setting information without excessively inciting gambling.

Next, the information disclosure process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the information disclosure process of the first embodiment. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance according to the set value without the effect control device 300 acquiring information regarding the set value from the game control device 100. The information disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The information disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D31 (see FIG. 49) of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit executes the setting process. The setting process is a process of accepting an operation of a player (may be an administrator or the like) and setting the disclosure content. The setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.

[Step D72] The control unit executes the collection process. The collection process is a process for collecting game history. The collection process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.
[Step D73] The control unit executes the aggregation process. The aggregation process is a process of calculating (aggregating) game performance from the collected game history. The aggregation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60.

[Step D74] The control unit executes the output information editing process. The output information editing process is a process for editing the output mode of the calculated game performance. The output information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

[Step D75] The control unit executes the in-game disclosure process. The in-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance during the game (special figure game) in the edited output mode. The in-game disclosure process will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

[Step D76] The control unit executes the non-game disclosure process, and ends the information disclosure process after the non-game disclosure process is executed. The non-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance in an edited output mode other than during the game (special figure game). The non-game disclosure process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the setting process of the first embodiment. The setting process is a process of accepting a player operation and setting the disclosure content. The setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D71 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D81] The control unit determines whether or not it is the setting acceptance timing. The setting acceptance timing is a timing that is preset as a timing at which the setting operation can be accepted, and for example, a customer waiting state is set as a timing that does not affect the progress of the game. The control unit proceeds to step D82 when it is the setting acceptance timing, and ends the setting process when it is not the setting acceptance timing.

[Step D82] The control unit causes the display device 41 to display the setting screen. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to the setting operation according to the displayed contents.
[Step D83] The control unit sets the aggregation period according to the setting operation. The aggregation period is a period to be aggregated in the period for collecting history (history collection period). The control unit sets the aggregation period by making it possible to select whether to set the entire history collection period as the aggregation period or a part of the history collection period as the aggregation period. Further, the control unit makes it possible to set either the start and the end, or the start and the end, and the size of the period when a part of the history collection period is set as the aggregation period. As a result, the control unit can set the period desired by the player as the aggregation period.

[Step D84] The control unit sets the output information according to the setting operation. The output information is the performance information to be output from the calculated performance information. The control unit sets the output information by making it possible to select whether to output all of the calculated performance information or a part of the calculated performance information as an output target. As a result, the control unit can output the performance information desired by the player.

[Step D85] The control unit sets the filter according to the setting operation. The filter filters the calculated performance information according to the gaming state. The control unit sets a filter by making it possible to select whether to output all the gaming states of the calculated performance information or to output a specific gaming state of the calculated performance information. As a result, the control unit can output the performance information in the gaming state desired by the player.

[Step D86] The control unit requests the player to confirm the setting content, proceeds to step D87 when the player confirms the setting content, and sets when the player does not confirm the setting content (for example, cancels). End the process.

[Step D87] The control unit updates the setting with the content received by the setting operation, and ends the setting process. The control unit may set a valid period (for example, 3 hours) in the updated setting contents and return to the default setting after the valid period has elapsed. Further, the control unit may set a default setting return condition (for example, transition to the customer waiting state) in the updated setting content, and return to the default setting after the condition is satisfied.

Next, the display screen of the display device 41 during the setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the setting screen of the first embodiment.
The display screen 350 shown in FIG. 55 (1) is a display screen displayed in step D82. The display screen 350 includes the title of the setting screen and the guidance of the setting operation in the display contents. For example, the display screen 350 displays "setting guessing assist" as the title of the setting screen, and displays the operation guidance using the push button 25 as the guidance of the setting operation.

The display screen 351 shown in FIG. 55 (2) is a display screen displayed in step D83. The display screen 351 is a display screen during which the aggregation period is set, and includes the title and options for which the aggregation period is set in the display content. For example, the display screen 351 displays "aggregation period setting" as the title during the aggregation period setting, and "1. all period", "2. variable period event", and "3. variable period" as options during the aggregation period setting. "Timer" and "4. Variable period user settings" are displayed. Further, the display screen 351 displays the selected option among the options for which the aggregation period is set so that it can be distinguished from other options. For example, the display screen 351 underlines the option “4. Variable period user setting” to indicate that the option is being selected.

The option "1. All period" is an option for totaling the entire period of the accumulated history information. The option "2. Variable period event" is an option in which a predetermined event trigger in the accumulated history information is set to the start and end, or the start or end. The option "3. Variable period timer" is an option in which a predetermined timer trigger in the accumulated history information is set to the start and end, or the start or end. The option "4. Variable period user setting" is an option in which the user sets one of the start and end, or the start and end (the other is the default) of the accumulated history information.

The display screen 352 shown in FIG. 55 (3) is a display screen when "4. Variable period user setting" is selected as an option during the aggregation period setting. The display screen 352 is a display screen during the option setting in the option "4. Variable period user setting", and includes the title and the option setting content in the option setting in the option "4. Variable period user setting" in the display content. For example, the display screen 352 displays "variable period user setting" as a title during option setting, and a total range selected from the history information accumulated as option setting content (from "from here" shown in the illustrated hatch). The range of "up to here") is displayed.

The display screen 353 shown in FIG. 55 (4) is a display screen displayed in step D84. The display screen 353 is a display screen during which output information is being set, and includes a title and options for which output information is being set in the display content. For example, the display screen 353 displays "output information setting" as a title during output information setting, and displays "1. hit probability" and "2. corresponding setting value" as options during output information setting. Further, the display screen 353 displays the selected option among the options for which the output information is set so as to be distinguishable from the other options. For example, the display screen 353 underlines the option “1. Probability of hitting” to indicate that the option is being selected. The selection during the output information setting may be one in which the options are exclusively selected, or one in which two or more options can be selected at the same time.

The option "1. Hit probability" is an option in which the hit probability in the special figure game (the combined probability of the special figure game 1 and the special figure game 2, or the respective probabilities) is used as output information. The option "2. Corresponding set value" is an option in which the set value (estimated value) corresponding to the hit probability is used as output information.

The display screen 354 shown in FIG. 55 (5) is a display screen displayed in step D85. The display screen 354 is a display screen during filter setting, and includes a title and options during filter setting in the display content. For example, the display screen 354 displays "filter setting" as the title during filter setting, and "1. all modes", "2. mode A", "3. mode B", and "4" as options during filter setting. Mode C ”,“ 5. Low probability ”,“ 6. High probability ”,“ 7. Electric support ”, and“ 8. Non-electric support ”are displayed. Further, the display screen 354 displays the selected option among the options in the filter setting so as to be distinguishable from the other options. For example, the display screen 354 underlines the option “6. High probability” to indicate that it is being selected.

The option "1. All modes" is an option in which all of the effect modes (or probability states) in the special figure game are targeted for output information. The options "2. Mode A", "3. Mode B", and "4. Mode C" are options for the output information of the corresponding effect mode among the effect modes in the special figure game. The option "5. Low probability" is an option for the output information of the low probability state among the probability states of the special figure game. The option "6. High probability" is an option for the output information of the high probability state among the probability states of the special figure game. The option "7. Electric support" is an option for which the output information is the state in which the normal electric support is provided (electric support) among the general electric support states of the special figure game. The option "8. Non-electric support" is an option for which the output information is the state in which there is no general electric support (non-electric support) among the normal electric support states of the special figure game.

The display screen 355 shown in FIG. 55 (6) is a display screen displayed in step D86. The display screen 355 is a display screen for confirming the setting content, and includes the title being confirmed for the setting content and the option for confirming the setting content in the display content. For example, the display screen 355 displays "setting content confirmation" as the title for which the setting content is being confirmed, and displays "OK" and "cancel" as the options for which the setting content is being confirmed.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can disclose the information desired by the player.
Next, the collection process will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the collection process of the first embodiment. The collection process is a process for collecting game history. The collection process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The collection process is a process executed by the control unit in step D72 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D91] The control unit determines whether or not there has been an instruction to reset the game history. The game history reset instruction is preferably input by the administrator, and is, for example, an operation input of the RAM initialization switch 112 of the game control device 100. The control unit proceeds to step D92 when there is an instruction to reset the game history, and proceeds to step D95 when there is no instruction to reset the game history.

[Step D92] The control unit clears the game history storage area (game history storage area). For example, the control unit clears the game history stored in FeRAM 323 to zero.
[Step D93] The control unit generates dummy data of the game history. The dummy data is data that prevents the calculation of the game performance that greatly deviates from the design value when the game history is small, and is generated based on, for example, the average game performance of all the set values. The dummy data may be prepared in advance.

[Step D94] The control unit stores the generated dummy data in the game history storage area.
[Step D95] The control unit determines whether or not a command (target command) including information for which the game history is to be collected has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D96 when the target command is received, and ends the collection process when the target command is not received.

[Step D96] The control unit acquires event information when the target command is received.
[Step D97] The control unit acquires the game state when the target command is received. The game state to be acquired is a game state used for filtering the target of output information, and includes, for example, a type of effect mode, a probability state of a special figure game, a general electric support state of a special figure game, and the like.

[Step D98] The control unit stores the information to be collected in the game history in the game history storage area as the game history in association with the game state when the target command is received. The game history storage area is, for example, a ring buffer, and the latest game history can be stored for a predetermined period by overwriting the old data with new data. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can accumulate the gaming history for a predetermined period including the dummy data. Further, the gaming machine 10 can accumulate the gaming history corresponding to the actual operation by replacing the dummy data with the gaming history.

Next, the game history stored in the game history storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the collected data of the first embodiment.
The control unit stores the game history as one event for each symbol change of the special figure game and one hit of the special figure game detected from the target command. The control unit assigns an event ID (ID) to each event and records the event type (type) and the event occurrence time (time). Further, the control unit records the probability state (probability fluctuation) of the special figure game in which the event occurs, the normal electric support state (electric support) of the special figure game, and the type of the effect mode (effect mode) for each event.

For example, the game history of the ID "xxx111" has the type "variation (design variation)" and the time "txxx111", and the game state at the time of the event is the probability fluctuation "high (high probability)" and the electric support "yes (normal)". (Electric support state) ”, indicating that the effect mode is“ A ”. Further, the game history of the ID "xxx211" is of type "variation" and time "txxx211", and the game state at the time of event occurrence is probability fluctuation "low (low probability)", electric support "yes", and production mode "A". ". In addition, the game history of the ID "xxx311" is the type "variation" and the time "txxx311", the game state at the time of the event is the probability fluctuation "low", the electric support "none (non-general support state)", and the production. Indicates that the mode is "B". Further, the game history of the ID "xxx701" is the type "hit (big hit)" and the time "txxx701", and the game state at the time of the event is the probability fluctuation "-(undefined)", the electric support "-", and the production. Indicates that the mode is "-". Even if the game state at the time of event occurrence is undefined for the event of type "hit", the control unit triggers the occurrence of a hit by referring to the game state at the time of the event of the type "variation" immediately before. It is possible to specify the game state of the variable display.

Next, the aggregation process will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the aggregation process of the first embodiment. The aggregation process is a process of calculating the game performance from the collected game history. The aggregation process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The aggregation process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D101] The control unit determines whether or not it is the aggregation timing. The control unit sets the aggregation timing when there is a margin in the processing resources of the effect control device 300. For example, the control unit sets the totaling timing to a state in which the game is not in progress (such as a waiting state for customers) or a symbol stop time after the symbol changes during the game. The control unit proceeds to step D102 when the aggregation timing is reached, and ends the aggregation process when it is not the aggregation timing.

[Step D102] The control unit acquires the aggregation period according to the setting.
[Step D103] The control unit aggregates the game history within the aggregation period among the game histories stored in the game history storage area for each game state.

[Step D104] The control unit stores the aggregation result (aggregation data) in the output information storage area (FeRAM323) and ends the aggregation process.
Next, the aggregated data stored in the output information storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of aggregated data of the first embodiment. The user-set period aggregated data shown in FIG. 59 is aggregated data in which the game history within the user-set aggregated period among the game histories stored in the game history storage area is aggregated.

The user-set period aggregate data includes the winning probability for each game state and the corresponding set value. The game states that are individually aggregated in the user-set period aggregation data are "low probability medium,-(regardless of the general electric power support status)," low probability medium, with electric support "," low probability medium, without electric support ", There are "high probability medium,-", "high probability medium, with electric support", and "high probability medium, without electric support". Further, there are "all modes", "mode A", "mode B", and "mode C" as the effect modes for individually totaling the user-set period total data. For example, in the game state "low probability medium,-", the winning probability "1/210" and the corresponding set value "3" are used as the aggregation result. The corresponding set value is an estimated value of the set value, and a set value having a game performance (hit probability) close to the hit probability "1/210" is selected and used as the aggregation result.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform aggregation according to the gaming state. Further, the gaming machine 10 can perform a sufficiently reliable aggregation depending on the gaming state even when the number of data is not sufficient by performing the aggregation for each gaming state. For example, the gaming machine 10 may sufficiently obtain the number of hit data in the high probability even if the number of hit data is not sufficiently obtained in the low probability. Further, since the gaming machine 10 aggregates for each of a plurality of gaming states or a plurality of production modes, it is possible to provide the aggregation result that the player believes regardless of whether the aggregation result is true or false. For example, the gaming machine 10 can give a high degree of satisfaction to a player who believes that the effect mode "mode A" is an aggregation result that correctly reflects the performance of the gaming machine. It should be noted that such mistakes of the player are corrected in the process of converging to the true value as the data is accumulated, and the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to provide the player with the process of converging to the true value as a new hobby.

Although the user-set period aggregated data has been described, the same can be applied to aggregated data for other aggregated periods. Further, the gaming machine 10 may aggregate the aggregated data of one aggregated period in parallel with the aggregated data of another aggregated period, or may aggregate one aggregated data in order to save processing resources. When aggregating the aggregated data of a period, the aggregated data of other aggregation periods may not be aggregated.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 can set the minimum amount of information for the aggregated data because the aggregated result that is too irrelevant will confuse the player. Next, securing the minimum amount of information of the aggregated data will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of securing the minimum amount of information in the aggregated data of the first embodiment.

FIG. 60 (1) shows the aggregated data that secures the minimum amount of information when the current day history information is used as aggregated data. Since the history information on the day exceeds the minimum amount of information, all of it is used as aggregated data. The minimum amount of information is a preset threshold value.

Next, when the current day history information is used as aggregated data, the aggregated data for which the minimum amount of information is not secured is shown in FIG. 60 (2). Since the history information on the day does not exceed the minimum amount of information, the shortage is supplemented with dummy data. The amount of dummy data to be supplemented can be reduced by increasing the history information on the day.

As another example, when the history information of the day is used as the aggregated data, the aggregated data for which the minimum amount of information is not secured is shown in FIG. 60 (3). Since the current day history information does not exceed the minimum amount of information, the shortage is supplemented with the previous day history information. The amount of the previous day history information to be supplemented can be reduced by increasing the current day history information.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure the minimum amount of information about the aggregated data, and can suppress the risk of presenting the incorrect aggregated result to the player.
Next, the output information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the output information editing process of the first embodiment. The output information editing process is a process for editing the output mode of the calculated game performance. The output information editing process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The output information editing process is a process executed by the control unit in step D74 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D111] The control unit acquires the aggregation result of the aggregation process.
[Step D112] The control unit acquires the setting contents set in the setting process.
[Step D113] The control unit determines the output content (output mode) from the aggregated results according to the set content.

[Step D114] The control unit determines the output timing of the output content according to the setting content or the game state, and ends the output information editing process. For example, the control unit determines at which timing the output content is to be output, depending on whether or not the game is in progress, whether or not the game is in motion, and whether or not the game is hit. More specifically, the control unit can quickly determine the output timing when the game is not in progress. Further, the control unit can determine the output timing waiting for the satisfaction of the preset output condition during the game. The output conditions set in advance take into consideration the matching with the game production and the influence on the game progress. For example, the control unit may generate an effect that can be replaced with the output content (for example, a character dialogue effect) or an effect that allows duplication with the output content (for example, a cut-in effect) while the variable display is in progress. Can be determined as the output timing. In addition, the control unit uses the occurrence timing of an effect that can be replaced with the output content (for example, an interval effect) or an effect that allows overlap with the output content (for example, an ending effect) if it is a hit. I can decide.

Next, the in-game disclosure process will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the in-game disclosure process of the first embodiment. The in-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance during the game (special figure game) in the edited output mode. The in-game disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The in-game disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D75 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D121] The control unit determines whether or not the information can be disclosed at the output timing determined in step D114 of the output information editing process. The control unit proceeds to step D122 when the information disclosure possible timing is reached, and ends the in-game disclosure process when the information disclosure possible timing is not reached.

[Step D122] The control unit determines whether or not the information disclosure lottery has been won. When the control unit wins the information disclosure lottery, the control unit proceeds to step D123 and subsequent steps to disclose the information. On the other hand, if the control unit does not win the information disclosure lottery, the control unit ends the in-game disclosure process without disclosing the information.

In this way, the control unit does not necessarily disclose information even when the information can be disclosed, but only when the lottery is won. The control unit suppresses frequent information disclosure during the game by disclosing information with a lottery probability of "less than 1" at the disclosure enable timing during the game (for example, during the reach production in the variable display game). Further, the control unit responds to the player's disclosure request by disclosing information with a lottery probability of "1" at the disclosure enable timing during non-game (for example, waiting for a customer).

[Step D123] The control unit acquires the output content determined in step D113 of the output information editing process.
[Step D124] The control unit selects an effect pattern according to the output content. For example, the control unit selects one or more selectable effect patterns (for example, cut-in, character dialogue, etc.) prepared in advance.

[Step D125] The control unit sets the selected effect pattern so that it can be output by the notification means, and ends the in-game disclosure process.
Next, the information disclosure effect of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the information disclosure screen of the first embodiment. FIG. 64 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the information disclosure screen of the first embodiment.

The display screen 500 shown in FIG. 63 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol is stopped, and the symbol is stopped and displayed before the fluctuation starts in the variation display game. The display screen 500 displays a large symbol group 501, a small symbol group 502, a special figure 1 hold number display 503, a special figure 2 hold number display 504, a hold display 505, and a hold digestion display 506.

The large symbol group 501 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 501 is displayed in a large size by setting a variable display area in a substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 501 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

On the display screen 500, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", the middle symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the right symbol indicates that the symbol is "7". Indicates that it is stopped at. That is, on the display screen 500, the large symbol group 501 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in the stopped state (the symbol is stopped).

The small symbol group 502 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 502 is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect by the large symbol group 501. The small symbol group 502 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. On the display screen 500, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol constituting the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 501 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 502, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 502 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 501, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, the position is fixed).

The special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is “4”. The special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game is “0”. The hold storage number displayed by the hold display 505 corresponds to the sum of the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display 503 and the hold storage number displayed by the special figure 2 hold number display 504.

For example, when the special figure 1 hold number display 503 displays "4" and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 displays "0" as shown on the display screen 500, the hold display 505 displays four hold storage displays. Indicates that the number of reserved storages is "4".

The hold display 505 can clearly indicate the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game and notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each hold storage according to the display mode (hold storage display displayed on the hold display 505).

The hold digestion display 506 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result depending on the display mode. On the display screen 500, the hold digestion display 506 sets a blank in the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in the stopped state. After this, the gaming machine 10 starts the variable display.

The display screen 510 shown in FIG. 63 (2) is a display screen after the variable display is started. The display screen 510 is a screen after the display screen 500, and shows a screen during variable display (during three symbols changing). On the display screen 510, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 501 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variable display game is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, on the display screen 510, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special symbol variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner.

On the display screen 510, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is "3", and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates that the hold memory number of the special figure 2 game is "3". It indicates that it is "0", and the hold display 505 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure variation display game is "3". Further, on the display screen 510, the hold digestion display 506 displays the hold storage display during digestion, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the variable display.

The display screen 511 shown in FIG. 63 (3) is a display screen when a reach effect occurs after the start of the variable display. The display screen 511 is a screen after the display screen 510, and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols display "3". The gaming machine 10 makes it possible to disclose the information calculated from the gaming history when a predetermined effect is generated during the reach fluctuation.

The display screen 512 shown in FIG. 63 (4) is a display screen of the cut-in effect during the reach effect. The display screen 512 is a screen after the display screen 511, and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols display "3". The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation with the cut-in display 513 (cut-in effect) for the variable display during the reach effect. The cut-in display 513 produces a predetermined degree of expectation with a rocket-like character 514 and a background. Further, the cut-in display 513 displays the disclosure information 515. For example, the disclosure information 515 includes "1/200" as the winning probability in the gaming state during the aggregation period set by the player. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can disclose information in cooperation with the gaming effect during the game.

The gaming machine 10 includes the disclosure information 515 in the display content in the cut-in effect during the reach effect, but the display content is not limited to this, and other variable display such as during the character effect, development effect, temporary stop, re-variation, etc. It may be inside or the symbol may be stopped.

The display screen 516 shown in FIG. 64 (1) is a display screen for the hit interval effect. The display screen 516 includes a hit type display 517, a game guide 518, a round display 519, and disclosure information 520 as display contents. The hit type display 517 indicates a hit name (for example, “X bonus”) in the production. The game guide 518 informs the player that the hitting direction is the right game area. The round display 519 displays a symbol (for example, a star-shaped display) corresponding to the round, and indicates the current number of rounds and the final number of rounds. The disclosure information 520 includes "1/210" as the winning probability in the gaming state during the aggregation period set by the player. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can disclose information in cooperation with the winning gaming effect.

The gaming machine 10 includes the disclosure information 520 in the display content in the hit interval effect, but the display content is not limited to this, and may be during fanfare, round, ending, or the like.

The display screen 521 shown in FIG. 64 (2) is a display screen during the general electric support (electric support). The display screen 521 includes a game status display 522, a game guide 518, and disclosure information 523 as display contents. The game state display 522 indicates a game state name (for example, "electric support"). The game state display 522 may display the game effect name (for example, "mode A"). The disclosure information 523 displays the character in relation to the disclosure information, with "1/21" as the winning probability in the game state for the aggregation period set by the player. For example, a character such as a tiger suggests a setting (eg, setting "2") corresponding to a hit probability "1/21".

The gaming machine 10 may disclose information limited to the gaming state in addition to the setting of the player or instead of the setting of the player. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the display screen 521 may display the hit probability in the normal electric support (electric support) as the disclosure information 523. Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, the display screen 521 displays the probability of hitting in high probability (including latent probability change), high probability (excluding latent probability change), and other gaming states as disclosure information 523. May be.

Further, on the display screen 521, the special figure 1 hold number display 503 indicates that the hold storage number of the special figure 1 game is "0", and the special figure 2 hold number display 504 indicates the hold storage of the special figure 2 game. Indicates that the number is "4". In addition, on the display screen 521, the hold display 505 and the hold digestion display 506 may be hidden but displayed in order to give priority to the visibility of the disclosure information 523.

The display screen 524 shown in FIG. 64 (3) is a display screen (another example) during the general electric support (electric support). The display screen 524 includes a game status display 522, a game guide 518, and disclosure information 525 as display contents. The game state display 522 indicates a game state name (for example, "electric support"). The disclosure information 525 displays "1/18" as the winning probability in the game state for the aggregation period set by the player, and the character is displayed in relation to the disclosure information. For example, a character such as a boy suggests a setting (eg, setting "4") corresponding to a hit probability "1/18".

The display screen 526 shown in FIG. 64 (4) is a display screen waiting for customers. The display screen 526 includes disclosure information 527 and operation guidance 528 as display contents. The disclosure information 527 displays "mode A" as a game effect name (may be a game state name) set by the player, displays a hit probability "1/170" in the game effect "mode A", and displays a hit probability "1/170". The setting "5") is displayed as the setting corresponding to "1/170". The operation guide 528 displays the push button 25 corresponding to the operation unit and the operation guide. The gaming machine 10 may be able to update the aggregation period, aggregation content, and display content at any time according to the received operation for information disclosure while waiting for customers.

The gaming machine 10 can also suggest setting the hit probability to the character, or by displaying the background instead of the character. Next, the suggestion of setting the hit probability by the background display will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion mode of the first embodiment.

The background display during information disclosure has a plurality of types of display modes depending on the suggested set value. The estimated setting value "0" displays the background in a white (illustrated in plain and light color) display mode. The estimated setting value "1" displays the background in a blue (illustrated by diagonal hatching) display mode. The estimated setting value "2" displays the background in a green (illustrated by cross-hatching) display mode. The estimated setting value "3" displays the background in a display mode of red (shown in plain dark color). The estimated set value "4" displays the background in the display mode of the petal pattern. The estimated setting value "5" displays the background in a rainbow-colored display mode.

As a result, the control unit can suggest the estimated set value with the background color of the predetermined effect display. For example, the control unit can suggest the estimated setting value "3" by setting the background display of the cut-in effect during the reach effect on the display screen 512 shown in FIG. 63 (4) to a solid color and dark color. The control unit may suggest the estimated set value not only at the background color of the effect display but also at other display points. Further, the control unit may suggest the estimated set value not only by the color and the pattern but also by other display modes.

Next, the non-game disclosure process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the non-game disclosure process of the first embodiment. The non-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance in an edited output mode other than during the game (special figure game). The non-game disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The non-game disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D76 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D131] The control unit determines whether or not there is a disclosure request operation during non-game. For example, the control unit determines that a predetermined operation input from the push button 25 waiting for a customer is a disclosure request operation during non-game. The control unit proceeds to step D132 when there is a disclosure request operation during non-game, and ends the non-game disclosure process when there is no disclosure request operation during non-game.

[Step D132] The control unit accepts a disclosure content selection operation such as an aggregation period, a game state, and a display content.
[Step D133] The control unit discloses information on the aggregated data in the aggregated period and the gaming state selected by the player. For example, the control unit discloses information by the display device 41.

[Step D134] The control unit determines whether or not to end the information disclosure. The control unit determines that the predetermined operation input from the push button 25 waiting for the customer is the information disclosure end operation. Further, the control unit determines that the start of the game is an information disclosure end operation. If the control unit does not end the information disclosure, the control unit proceeds to step D132 and continues the information disclosure. On the other hand, the control unit ends the non-game disclosure process when the information disclosure is finished.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can disclose desired aggregated data to the player even during non-game.
Next, the in-game disclosure process of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the in-game disclosure process of the modified example of the first embodiment. The gaming machine 10 of the modified example discloses information at the time of an effect (for example, a push button effect) accompanied by reception of a player operation during a game. The in-game disclosure process of the modified example is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The in-game disclosure process of the modified example is a process executed by the control unit in step D75 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D141] The control unit determines whether or not the player operation has been received during the reception time of the effect accompanied by the reception of the player operation. The control unit proceeds to step D142 when there is no reception of the player operation, and proceeds to step D143 when the reception of the player operation is received.

[Step D142] When there is no reception of the player operation, the control unit selects a game production pattern (non-reception effect pattern) when the player operation is not received. The control unit sets the selected non-reception effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. As described above, the gaming machine 10 does not give the player an opportunity to disclose information when the player operation is not accepted. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can encourage the player to participate in the game.

[Step D143] When the player operation is received, the control unit draws a lottery as to whether or not to disclose the information. The control unit proceeds to step D144 when the lottery for disclosing information is lost, and proceeds to step D145 when the lottery for disclosing information is won.

[Step D144] When the lottery for disclosing information is lost, the control unit selects a game effect pattern (reception effect pattern) that is a game effect pattern when the player operation is received and does not involve information disclosure. do. The control unit sets the selected reception effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. As described above, the gaming machine 10 prepares a case where the player is not given an opportunity to disclose information even when the player operation is accepted. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the value as a privilege for information disclosure and encourage the player to participate in the game.

[Step D145] When the lottery for disclosing information is won, the control unit acquires the output content determined in step D113 of the output information editing process.
[Step D146] The control unit selects an effect pattern (a game effect pattern accompanied by information disclosure (disclosure effect pattern)) that is a game effect pattern when a player operation is received and is in accordance with the output content. The control unit sets the selected disclosure effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. In this way, the gaming machine 10 gives the player an opportunity to disclose information while producing a rarity even when the player's operation is accepted. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the value as a privilege for information disclosure and encourage the player to participate in the game.

The gaming performance of the gaming machine 10 may change depending on the setting change. Further, since the gaming machine 10 involves turning on the power to change the setting, it is desirable to aggregate the data in the history information unit within the range not straddling the turning on the power if a sufficient amount of data can be secured. Further, the gaming machine 10 compares the history information before and after the power is turned on to estimate whether or not the setting is changed, and if it is estimated that there is no setting change even if the history information straddles the power on, the power is turned on. It may be regarded as history information in a range that does not straddle.

Further, although the gaming machine 10 can notify the hit probability and the estimated set value, other performance information may be notified. For example, the gaming machine 10 may notify the probability fluctuation inrush rate, the electric support inrush rate, the probability fluctuation, the number of consecutive hits in the electric support, the number of prize balls won, the base, and the like.

The settings in the gaming machine 10 may be set as follows to prevent fraud.
(1) The game control device 100 executes a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 when the setting is changed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 prevents the gaming machine 10 from performing gaming control over different set values.

(2) The game control device 100 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal plate 71 when the setting is changed and the setting is confirmed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can notify the externally connected device (for example, a hall computer, an information disclosure device such as a call lamp) that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed. The externally connected device to which the security signal is input can notify that the setting has been changed or the setting has been confirmed by the notification means (lamp, sound (including voice), etc.). The game control device 100 may output a security signal common to the setting change and the setting confirmation, or may output a security signal that can distinguish between the setting change and the setting confirmation.

(3) The game control device 100 is housed in a board box and attached to the back surface side of the front frame 12. The game control device 100 is protected by a sealed board box except that a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), various connectors, and the like face the outside. As a result, the main medium (game microcomputer 111, etc.) that triggers the transition of setting change or setting confirmation is protected by the sealed board box. Further, in the game control device 100, the setting key switch 127 is faced to the outside, and a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126) other than the setting key switch 127 is sealed by a board box. It may be something to protect.

(4) The game control device 100 does not have a setting key because the operation of the setting key switch 127 is indispensable for access to the main medium (game microcomputer 111, etc.) that triggers the transition of setting change or setting confirmation. Eliminate access to third party main media. The game control device 100 may be configured to enable access to a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126) by operating the setting key switch 127. For example, the game control device 100 may be configured to enable physical operation (for example, opening / closing of an operation window) to the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting value change switch 126 by operating the setting key switch 127, or may be set. The operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the set value change switch 126 may be electrically or logically enabled by the operation of the key switch 127, or a combination thereof may be used.

(5) The game control device 100 includes a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127) and a required information display unit (status display device 135, probability setting value display device 136). Is controlled by the gaming microcomputer 111. The game control device 100 may include an error release switch used for error release and a game start switch that gives a game start opportunity, and the error release switch and the game start switch are also controlled by the game microcomputer 111. You may do it.

(6) The game control device 100 determines four power-on states from the combination of the input states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the game control device 100 is in a setting change state in which the set value can be changed, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is set to the setting confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed. Is set to the RAM clear (RWM clear) state for forcibly initializing, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the power is turned on to the power failure recovery (recovery) state.

(7) In the setting change state, the gaming machine 10 can change the setting in the following steps. The setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state and the setting key is inserted in the OFF state (step 1). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) to switch the setting key switch 127 to the ON state (step 2). By turning on the power (power switch ON) while pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (ON), the setting is changed (step 3). In the setting change state, the setting value is changed each time the setting value change switch 126 is pressed (step 4). By operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state, the setting value is confirmed and the setting change state is terminated (step 5).

At this time, the setting change is notified in steps 3 and 4 by the notification means (for example, the display by the display device 41, the sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46). At 5, the RAM clear is notified. Further, the external information output means (for example, the external information terminal plate 71) outputs the security signal in steps 3 and 4, and stops the output of the security signal in step 5. The game control device 100 executes RAM clear in step 3 prior to the RAM clear notification in step 5. That is, the game control device 100 gives priority to the setting change notification over the RAM clear notification, thereby promptly performing the setting value change notification and improving the effect as a fraud prevention measure. Further, the probability set value display device 136 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in steps 3 and 4, and turns off in step 5. Further, the status display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 to 4, and the base value is displayed in step 5. The gaming machine 10 may be provided with the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 integrally, and for example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability setting value display device 136. In that case, the status display device 135 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in steps 3 and 4, and displays the base value in step 5. The game state of the game control device 100 is before the start of the game in steps 3 and 4, the game starts in step 5, and the game is in progress thereafter.

(8) The gaming machine 10 can confirm the setting in the following steps in the setting confirmation state. The setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state and the setting key is inserted in the OFF state (step 1). The setting key is operated (for example, turned) to switch the setting key switch 127 to the ON state (step 2). By turning on the power (power switch ON) without pressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (OFF), the setting confirmation state is set (step 3). The setting confirmation state is terminated by operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state (step 4).

At this time, the setting confirmation is notified in step 3 by the notification means (for example, the display by the display device 41, the sound (voice) by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the light emission by the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46). Further, the external information output means (for example, the external information terminal plate 71) outputs the security signal in step 3 and stops the output of the security signal in step 4. Further, the probability set value display device 136 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in step 3, and turns off in step 4. Further, the status display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 to 3, and the base value is displayed in step 4. The gaming machine 10 may be provided with the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 integrally, and for example, the state display device 135 may also serve as the probability setting value display device 136. In that case, the status display device 135 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in step 3, and displays the base value in step 4. The game state of the game control device 100 is before the start of the game in step 3, the game starts in step 4, and the game is in progress thereafter.

The gaming machine 10 is designed so that setting changes and setting confirmations can be performed only before the start of the game when the power is turned on. As a result, the gaming machine 10 eliminates setting changes and setting confirmations during the game, and facilitates operation guarantee during the game.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has a main control device (game control device 100) that allows game-related settings to be selected from a plurality of types and performs game control, and a slave control that performs effect control based on commands from the main control device. A device (effect control device 300) is provided. The slave control device includes a control unit (CPU311) that generates a game history based on a command, calculates a game performance in a predetermined game state from the game history, and notifies the game performance at a predetermined notification trigger.

(2) The control unit of (1) generates a game history based on a command accompanying the game progress according to the set value.
(3) The control unit of (1) accepts the operation of the player (or the administrator, etc.) and sets the notification content (disclosure content).

(4) The control unit of (1) notifies (discloses) the game performance during the game (special figure game).
(5) The control unit of (1) notifies (discloses) the game performance except during the game (special figure game) (for example, waiting for a customer).

(6) The control unit of (1) makes it possible to set a period (aggregation period) to be aggregated among the periods for collecting history (history collection period).
(7) The control unit of (1) sets the minimum amount of information for the aggregated data, and fills the shortage of the minimum amount of information with dummy data.

(8) The control unit of (1) sets the minimum amount of information for the aggregated data, and sets the shortage of the minimum amount of information to the past history information (for example, the previous day's history information, or similar aggregated data even before the previous day). Replenish with the history information you have).

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. Conventionally, one control program has been shared for the same processing, such as using the same table data even if different input parameters (commands) are used for the effect control process in the effect control device 300. However, when it is desired to modify only the processing of some input parameters (commands) in the development process, the development burden tends to increase. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment prepares each control program when the input parameters (commands) are different even if the same processing is performed, such as using the same table data. As a result, when the gaming machine 10 wants to modify only the processing of some input parameters (commands) in the development process, the modification range may be modified only by the processing of the input parameters, and the development burden of the program can be reduced.

First, a typical variation display sequence of the special figure game (special figure 1 game, special figure 2 game) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display sequence of the second embodiment.

In the illustrated variation display sequence, the time T00 from the variation start timing t0 to the variation stop timing t3 is defined as the variation display time (including the temporary stop time and excluding the symbol stop time). In this fluctuation display sequence, the time T01 from the fluctuation start timing t0 to the timing t1 is the first half fluctuation, the time T02 from the timing t1 to the timing t2 is the second half fluctuation, and the time T03 from the timing t2 to the fluctuation stop timing t3 is a temporary stop. do.

The effect control device 300 receives a variation start command from the game control device 100 to start the symbol variation (variation start), and receives a stop command to stop the symbol variation (variation stop). The variation start command may be one command or a command set consisting of two or more commands (for example, a stop symbol command, a variation pattern command, a hold command, etc.).

The effect control device 300 receives the variation start command and determines the effect control content for each of the first half variation, the second half variation, and the temporary stop. The latter half fluctuation may include a temporary stop. Therefore, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation by one effect control program, and determines the effect control content of the second half variation by another effect control program. Further, the variation display sequence can include one or more sub-effects as a sub-sequence in the basic sequence when the first half variation, the second half variation, and the temporary stop are set as the basic sequence.

For example, the effect control device 300 can selectively include the sub-effect of time T04 and the sub-effect of time T05 in the first half variation from the variation start timing t0 to the timing t1.

The effect control device 300 determines all the effect control contents (lottery) by the start of the first half change, and performs the effect control during the change according to the determined effect control contents. The production control content may be determined (lottery) at any time according to the progress of the control.

Next, the effect distribution for each effect control program that determines the effect control content in the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of an effect control unit for variable display of the second embodiment.

The table of FIG. 69 (1) shows the combination of the first half variation and the second half variation of the effect control program unit. First half fluctuation There is no paired second half fluctuation in "shortening loss", "normal loss", "step-up loss", and "pseudo-continuous loss". That is, the first half fluctuation "shortening loss", "normal loss", "step-up loss", and "pseudo-continuous loss" pass the second half fluctuation and temporarily stop.

On the other hand, the first half fluctuation "normal reach", "step-up reach", and "pseudo-continuous reach" are paired with the second half fluctuation "step-up distribution". The latter half variation "step-up distribution" has two or more distribution patterns, omitting details.

The effect control device 300 is applied to each of the first half fluctuation "shortening loss", "normal loss", "normal reach", "step-up loss", "step-up reach", "pseudo-ream loss", and "pseudo-reach". Prepare the corresponding production control program. Further, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program corresponding to each distribution pattern of the latter half variation “step-up distribution”.

The table of FIG. 69 (2) shows a list of sub-effects. Sub-directions include "PB (push button) notice" and "PB background change". The effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program corresponding to each sub effect.

The effect control program may be provided with one effect control program corresponding to one input parameter (command), or one effect control corresponding to two or more input parameters (commands). A program may be provided. Further, the effect control program may be an independent program as long as the control unit is independent, and may be a subroutine or the like in one program, not limited to the independent program.

Next, the effect control program and the reference table group in the first half variation will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program of an effect control unit and a reference table group in the first half variation of the second embodiment.

The effect control device 300 executes the first half variation program (effect control program) "program MP1" while referring to the reference table group (table set) "table set MA", thereby performing the effect control content of the first half variation "shortening loss". To decide.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation "normal loss" by executing the first half variation program "program MP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB".

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation "normal reach" by executing the first half variation program "program MP3" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB".

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation "step-up loss" by executing the first half variation program "program MP4" while referring to the reference table group "table set MC".

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation "step-up reach" by executing the first half variation program "program MP5" while referring to the reference table group "table set MC".

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation "pseudo-continuous loss" by executing the first half variation program "program MP6" while referring to the reference table group "table set MD".

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the first half variation "pseudo continuous reach" by executing the first half variation program "program MP7" while referring to the reference table group "table set MD".

In this way, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program for each of the first half fluctuations. Further, the effect control device 300 prepares a table set for each change in the first half. The table set may be prepared for each effect control program (for example, the table set “table set MA”) or shared by two or more effect control programs (for example, the table set “table set MA”). It may be a table set MB ”).

Next, the effect control program and the reference table group in the sub-effect will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program of an effect control unit and a reference table group in the sub-effect of the second embodiment.

The effect control device 300 executes the sub-effect program (effect control program) "program SP1" while referring to the reference table group (table set) "table set SA" to control the effect of the sub-effect "PB notice". To decide.

Further, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control content of the sub effect "PB background change" by executing the sub effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB".

In this way, the effect control device 300 prepares an effect control program for each sub effect. Further, the effect control device 300 prepares a table set for each sub effect. The table set may be prepared for each effect control program (for example, the table set “table set SA”), or may be shared by two or more effect control programs.

Although the combination of the control program of the effect control unit and the reference table group has been described for the first half variation and the sub-effect, the same applies to the second half variation. In the following, the first half variation and the sub-effect will be described, and the same description of the second half variation will be omitted.

Next, the effect control program executed in the process of determining the effect control content of the first half variation and the referenced table set will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program and a reference table group in the first half variation execution control of the second embodiment.

When the effect control device 300 receives the fluctuation start command related to the normal loss, the effect control device 300 executes the first half fluctuation program "program MP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB", from the fluctuation start timing t0 to the timing t1. The production control content of the first half fluctuation "normal loss" of is determined.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the fluctuation start command related to the normal reach, the effect control device 300 executes the first half fluctuation program “program MP3” while referring to the reference table group “table set MB”, thereby timing from the fluctuation start timing t0. The production control content of the first half fluctuation "normal reach" up to t1 is determined.

The first half variable programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are prepared separately, but the reference table group to be referred to is the same (reference table group "table set MB"), and the control contents are the same. be.

Further, the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" enable the sub-effects "PB notice" and "PB background change" to be executed during the first half fluctuation, respectively. For example, the effect control device 300 determines the execution of the sub effect "PB notice" during the execution of the first half variation program "program MP2" or "program MP3". When the effect control device 300 executes the sub effect "PB notice", the effect control device 300 executes the sub effect program "program SP1" while referring to the reference table group "table set SA", whereby the effect control device 300 executes the sub effect "program SP1" at time T04. The content of the production control of "PB notice" is determined. Further, the effect control device 300 determines the execution of the sub effect "PB background change" during the execution of the first half variation program "program MP2" or "program MP3". When the effect control device 300 executes the sub effect "PB background change", the effect control device 300 executes the sub effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB", whereby the sub effect of the time T04 is executed. The production control content of the "PB notice" is determined.

Next, the table set "table set MB" referred to by the effect control device 300 during the execution of the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half variation of the second embodiment.

The table set "table set MB" includes a table "table MB1", a table "table MB2", a table "table MB3", a table "table MB4", and a table "table MB5".

Each table is a data table and includes an effect pattern that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and a selection probability (lottery probability) thereof. For example, the table "table MB1" includes the effect patterns "pattern 11", "pattern 12", "pattern 13", and "pattern 14". Further, the table "table MB2" includes the effect patterns "pattern 21" and "pattern 22". Further, the table "table MB3" includes the effect patterns "pattern 31" and "pattern 32". Further, the table "table MB4" includes the effect patterns "pattern 41" and "pattern 42". Further, the table "table MB5" includes the effect patterns "pattern 51" and "pattern 52". The effect pattern included in each table may be only one or two or more.

The solid line connecting the tables in the figure shows the control sequences of the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3". For example, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" have a control sequence that first refers to the table "table MB1" and selects an effect pattern defined by the table "table MB1". When the effect pattern "pattern 11" is selected in the table "table MB1", the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" refer to the table "table MB2" and the effect pattern defined by the table "table MB2". Has a control sequence to select. Further, in the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3", when the effect pattern "pattern 12" is selected in the table "table MB1", the table "table MB3" is referred to and the table "table MB3" defines. It has a control sequence for selecting an effect pattern. Further, in the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3", when the effect pattern "pattern 13" or "pattern 14" is selected in the table "table MB1", the effect control content of the sub effect "PB notice" is set. It has a control sequence for executing (execution of the subsequence) the sub-effect program "program SP1" to be determined.

Then, the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are control sequences that end the first half fluctuation and connect to the second half fluctuation "second half A" when the effect pattern "pattern 21" is selected in the table "table MB2". Have. Further, in the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3", when the effect pattern "pattern 22" is selected in the table "table MB2", the table "table MB4" is referred to and the table "table MB4" defines. It has a control sequence for selecting an effect pattern.

Then, the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are control sequences that end the first half fluctuation and connect to the second half fluctuation "second half A" when the effect pattern "pattern 31" is selected in the table "table MB3". Have. Further, the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are control sequences that end the first half fluctuation and connect to the second half fluctuation "second half B" when the effect pattern "pattern 32" is selected in the table "table MB3". Have.

Then, when the effect pattern "Pattern 41" or "Pattern 42" is selected in the table "Table MB4", the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" end the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation "second half A". Has a control sequence to connect to.

Then, the first half variable programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" refer to the table "table MB5" after executing the sub-effect program "program SP1", and control to select the effect pattern defined by the table "table MB5". Has a sequence.

The first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are sub-effect programs that determine the effect control content of the sub-effect "PB background change" when the effect pattern "pattern 51" is selected in the table "table MB5". It has a control sequence for executing "program SP2" (execution of subsequence). Further, the first half fluctuation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are control sequences that end the first half fluctuation and connect to the second half fluctuation "second half C" when the effect pattern "pattern 52" is selected in the table "table MB5". Have.

The first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" have a control sequence for ending the first half variation and connecting to the second half variation "second half C" after executing the sub-effect program "program SP2".

In this way, the effect control device 300 can determine the effect content of the first half variation.
Next, the table set "table set SA" referred to by the effect control device 300 during the execution of the sub-effect program "program SP1" and the table set "table set SB" referenced during the execution of the sub-effect program "program SP2". Will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the sub-effect of the second embodiment.

FIG. 74 (1) shows a table set “table set SA” referred to by the effect control device 300 during execution of the sub-effect program “program SP1”. The table set "table set SA" includes the table "table SA1". The table "table SA1" includes the effect patterns "pattern 61", "pattern 62", "pattern 63", and "pattern 64".

The solid line connecting the tables in the figure indicates the control sequence of the sub-effect program “program SP1”. For example, the sub-effect program "program SP1" has a control sequence that refers to the table "table SA1" and selects an effect pattern defined by the table "table SA1".

The sub-effect program "program SP1" is a caller (regardless of which of the effect patterns "pattern 61", "pattern 62", "pattern 63", and "pattern 64" is selected in the table "table SA1". It has a control sequence that returns to the program of the execution source) (for example, the first half variable program “program MP2”).

The effect pattern "Pattern 61" (indicated by cross-hatching) is a specific effect that requires attention to the consistency of the effect, and is, for example, a correct effect. The correct effect can be selected only by the variable display that derives the hit, and must not be selected by the variable display that does not derive the hit.

Since the sub-effect program "program SP1" and the table set "table set SA" (table "table SA1") include such a specific effect as a control target, the first half variation program "program" is a control point that requires attention to consistency. It is separated from "MP2" and "Program MP3". That is, since the effect control device 300 separates the control points requiring attention from the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" and the table set "table set MB", the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" And the consistency as a whole is ensured while ensuring the degree of freedom for changing the table set "table set MB".

FIG. 74 (2) shows a table set “table set SB” referred to by the effect control device 300 during execution of the sub-effect program “program SP2”. The table set "table set SB" includes the tables "table SB1" and "table SB2". The table "table SB1" includes the effect patterns "pattern 71" and "pattern 72". The table "table SB2" includes the effect patterns "pattern 81" and "pattern 82".

The solid line connecting the tables in the figure indicates the control sequence of the sub-directing program "program SP2". For example, the sub-effect program "program SP2" has a control sequence that first refers to the table "table SB1" and selects the effect pattern defined by the table "table SB1".

Then, when the effect pattern "pattern 71" is selected in the table "table SB1", the sub-effect program "program SP2" refers to the table "table SB2" and selects the effect pattern defined by the table "table SB2". It has a control sequence. Further, when the effect pattern "pattern 72" is selected in the table "table SB1", the sub-effect program "program SP2" returns to the program of the caller (execution source) (for example, the first half variable program "program MP2"). It has a control sequence.

Then, the sub-effect program "program SP2" is a program of the caller (execution source) (for example, regardless of which of the effect patterns "pattern 81" and "pattern 82" is selected in the table "table SB2". It has a control sequence to return to the first half fluctuation program "program MP2").

The effect patterns "Pattern 71" and "Pattern 81" (indicated by cross-hatching) are specific effects that require attention to the consistency of the effects, and are, for example, accurate effects. The correct effect can be selected only by the variable display that derives the hit, and must not be selected by the variable display that does not derive the hit.

Since the sub-effect program "program SP2" and the table set "table set SB" (table "table SB1", "table SB2") include such a specific effect as a control target, they are control points that require attention to consistency. It is separated from the first half variable programs "program MP2" and "program MP3". That is, since the effect control device 300 separates the control points requiring attention from the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" and the table set "table set MB", the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" And the consistency as a whole is ensured while ensuring the degree of freedom for changing the table set "table set MB".

Next, the table data will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of table data of the second embodiment.
FIG. 75 (1) shows the table data of the table “table MB1”. The table "table MB1" includes an effect pattern that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and a selection probability (lottery probability) thereof. For example, the table "table MB1" includes the effect patterns "pattern 11", "pattern 12", "pattern 13", and "pattern 14" as selectable effect patterns. In the table "table MB1", when command A is used as an input parameter, that is, when the fluctuation start command is command A, the selection probability of the effect pattern "pattern 11" is "A11%", and the effect pattern "pattern 12". The selection probability of the effect pattern is "A12%", the selection probability of the effect pattern "Pattern 13" is "A13%", and the selection probability of the effect pattern "Pattern 14" is "A14%". At this time, the sum of the selection probabilities of all the production patterns is "100%". The same applies when command B or command D is an input parameter.

The table "table MB1" indicates that none of the effect patterns "pattern 11", "pattern 12", "pattern 13", and "pattern 14" is selected when the command C is used as an input parameter. In other words, the table "table MB1" indicates that command C is not an input parameter.

FIG. 75 (2) shows the table data of the table “table SB1”. The table "table SB1" includes an effect pattern that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and a selection probability (lottery probability) thereof. For example, the table "table SB1" includes the effect patterns "pattern 71" and "pattern 72" as selectable effect patterns. In the table "table SB1", when command A is used as an input parameter, that is, when the fluctuation start command is command A, the selection probability of the effect pattern "pattern 71" is "A71%", and the effect pattern "pattern 72". It is shown that the selection probability of is "A72%". At this time, the sum of the selection probabilities of all the production patterns is "100%". The same applies when command B or command D is an input parameter.

The table "table SB1" indicates that neither the effect pattern "pattern 71" nor the "pattern 72" is selected when the command C is used as an input parameter. In other words, the table "table SB1" indicates that command C is not an input parameter.

Further, in the table "table SB1", the pattern "pattern 71" is used as a specific effect. The table "table SB1" includes the pattern "pattern 71". Therefore, the table "table SB1" can close the range requiring attention to the consistency of the effect to the range of the table "table SB1" even if the pattern "pattern 71" is changed.

Although the tables "table MB1" and "table SB1" have been described as representatives, the same can be applied to other tables.
Next, the first half effect distribution processing will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the first half effect distribution processing of the second embodiment. The first half effect distribution process is a process of distributing the first half variable program to be executed for each input parameter (command). The first half effect distribution process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The first half effect distribution process is a process executed by the control unit in step D56 of the received command analysis process.

[Step D151] The control unit acquires a command (variation start command) as an input parameter.
[Step D152] The control unit branches to the step corresponding to the acquired command (first half effect distribution).

[Step D153] The control unit executes the shortened loss process when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation "shortened loss". The shortened loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program “program MP1” while referring to the reference table group “table set MA”. The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the shortened loss process.

[Step D154] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation "normal loss", the control unit executes the normal loss process. The normal loss process is a process of executing the first half variable program "program MP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB". The control unit normally ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the loss process.

[Step D155] The control unit executes the normal reach process when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation "normal reach". The normal reach process is a process of executing the first half variable program "program MP3" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB". The control unit normally ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the reach process.

[Step D156] The control unit executes the step-up loss process when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation "step-up loss". The step-up loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP4" while referring to the reference table group "table set MC". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the step-up loss process.

[Step D157] The control unit executes the step-up reach process when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half variation "step-up reach". The step-up reach process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP5" while referring to the reference table group "table set MC". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the step-up reach process.

[Step D158] The control unit executes the pseudo-continuous loss process when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation "pseudo-continuous loss". The pseudo-continuous loss process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP6" while referring to the reference table group "table set MD". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the pseudo-continuous loss process.

[Step D159] The control unit executes the pseudo-continuous reach process when the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half variation "pseudo-continuous reach". The pseudo-continuous reach process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP7" while referring to the reference table group "table set MD". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution process after executing the pseudo-continuous reach process.

Next, on behalf of the shortened loss process, the normal loss process, the normal reach process, the step-up loss process, the step-up reach process, the pseudo-continuous loss process, and the pseudo-continuous reach process, the normal loss process is performed using FIG. 77. explain. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal loss processing of the second embodiment.

The normal loss process is a process of executing the first half variable program "program MP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB". Normally, the loss process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The normal loss process is a process executed by the control unit in step D154 of the first half effect distribution process.

[Step D161] The control unit acquires a table set (reference table group "table set MB").
[Step D162] The control unit sets the head sequence.

[Step D163] The control unit selects a table corresponding to the set sequence.
[Step D164] The control unit selects and sets an effect pattern by lottery with reference to the selected table.

[Step D165] The control unit determines whether or not the current sequence is the last sequence. If the current sequence is not the last sequence, the control unit proceeds to step D166, and if the current sequence is the last sequence, the control unit normally ends the loss process.

[Step D166] The control unit updates the sequence.
[Step D167] The control unit proceeds to step D163 when the updated sequence specifies the next table selection, and proceeds to step D168 when the updated sequence specifies the execution of the sub-effect.

[Step D168] The control unit distributes sub-effects according to the updated sequence. The control unit proceeds to step D169 when the sub-effect according to the updated sequence is a PB notice, and proceeds to step D170 when the PB background change.

[Step D169] The control unit executes PB advance notice processing. The PB advance notice process is a process of executing the sub-effect program "program SP1" while referring to the reference table group "table set SA". The control unit proceeds to step D165 after executing the PB advance notice process.

[Step D170] The control unit executes the PB background change process. The PB background change process is a process of executing the sub-effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB". The control unit proceeds to step D165 after executing the PB background change process.

Next, the PB background change process will be described with reference to FIG. 78 on behalf of the PB notice process and the PB background change process. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the PB background change process of the second embodiment.

The PB background change process is a process of executing the sub-effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB". The PB background change process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU311) of the effect control device 300. The PB background change process is a process executed by the control unit during the execution of the effect control program (for example, step D170 of the normal loss process).

[Step D171] The control unit acquires a table set (reference table group "table set SA").
[Step D172] The control unit sets the head sequence.

[Step D173] The control unit selects a table corresponding to the set sequence.
[Step D174] The control unit selects and sets an effect pattern by lottery with reference to the selected table.

[Step D175] The control unit determines whether or not the current sequence is the last sequence. If the current sequence is not the last sequence, the control unit proceeds to step D176, and if the current sequence is the last sequence, the control unit ends the PB background change process.

[Step D176] The control unit updates the sequence and proceeds to step D173.
The gaming machine 10 reduces the development burden of the program of the effect control device 300 by such an effect control program.

For example, the first half fluctuation "normal loss" and the first half fluctuation "normal reach" are realized by the process of executing the first half fluctuation program "program MP2" while the same production control is performed, and the first half fluctuation "normal loss" is realized. "Normal reach" is realized by the process of executing the first half variable program "program MP3". That is, the first half fluctuation "normal loss" and the first half fluctuation "normal reach" realize the same effect control by different programs.

Here, a case where the effect control content of the first half variation “normal reach” is changed in the development process will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. 79 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half variation modified in the development process of the second embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half variation modified in the development process of the second embodiment.

In the first half fluctuation "normal reach" in the development process, the reference table group is replaced with the reference table group "table set MBa". As a result, the first half fluctuation that refers to the reference table group "table set MB" is only the first half fluctuation "normal loss".

Further, in the development process, the change from the first half fluctuation program "program MP3" to the first half fluctuation program "program MP3a" has no effect on the first half fluctuation "normal reach".

In the reference table group "table set MBa", the table "table MB4" is replaced with the table "table MB9". In addition, the first half variation program "Program MP3a" has three locations before and after the table "Table MB9" and one location away from the table "Table MB9" (after the table "Table MB3"), for a total of four locations. The branch is replaced with.

Such a change in the control content of the first half fluctuation "normal reach" in the development process also becomes the first half fluctuation "normal loss" when the program is shared between the first half fluctuation "normal loss" and the first half fluctuation "normal reach". It will reach. However, since the gaming machine 10 does not share the program between the first half fluctuation "normal loss" and the first half fluctuation "normal reach", it is possible to isolate the influence range of the change in the control content.

Although both the first half variation program and the reference table group are changed in the gaming machine 10, one of them may be changed.
Further, the first half variation "normal reach" includes PB notice processing and PB background change processing in its control range, but the processing contents of PB notice processing and PB background change processing are entrusted to each sub-directing program. Independent of the first half fluctuation program. Therefore, the PB advance notice processing and the PB background change processing are not affected by the change of the first half variation program and its reference table group.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a main control device (game control device 100) that performs game control, and a slave control device (effect control device 300) that performs effect control based on commands from the main control device. The slave control device has a storage unit that stores table data that defines the distribution of effects, and table data (reference table group "table") based on the first command among the commands (for example, a fluctuation start command corresponding to a normal loss). The production distribution from the "set MB", the reference table group "table set SA", and the reference table group "table set SB") is assigned to the first program (for example, the first half fluctuation program "program MP2" of the first half fluctuation "normal loss"). The second control, which is different from the first program, is the production distribution from the table data based on the first control (normal loss processing) controlled by execution and the second command (for example, the fluctuation start command corresponding to the normal reach) among the commands. It includes a control unit (CPU311) capable of executing a second control (normal reach processing) controlled by executing a program (for example, the first half variation program “program MP3” of the first half variation “normal reach”).
(2) The table data of (1) includes a first table data (reference table group "table set MB") that does not include a specific effect, and a second table data (reference table group "table set SA") that includes a specific effect. Including the reference table group "table set SB"), the control unit executes the first control for distributing the effect from the first table data based on the first command by executing the first program, and the second program. By executing, the second control for distributing the effect from the first table data is executed based on the second command, and the third program different from the first program and the second program (for example, the sub-effect program of the sub-variation "PB notice"). By executing the "program SP1"), the third control (PB notice processing) for distributing the effect from the second table data is executed based on the first command or the second command.

[Third Embodiment]
First, the configuration of the gaming board of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 is a front view (No. 1) showing an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a front view (No. 2) showing an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

The game board 700 in FIG. 81 shows a state in which a movable accessory is stored, and the game board 700 in FIG. 82 shows a state in which the stored movable accessory is visibly appearing.
As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the game board 700 is provided with a center case 40 substantially in the center. Inside the center case 40, there are a display device 41, a second display device 701, lighting units 702a to 702c, a logo display unit 703, a first board effect device 704, and a second board effect device 705L, 705R. , A third board effect device 706 and a fourth board effect device 707 are provided.

The second display device 701 notifies information about the game (for example, the production of the game) by the display. In the game board 700, the second display device 701 has a hexagonal shape, and a display portion for displaying predetermined information such as characters is formed in the central portion, and a frame portion is formed so as to surround the display portion. .. The frame portion is configured so that it can be lit with a plurality of lighting colors (for example, it is configured by an LED).

The lighting units 702a to 702c notify information about the game (progress of the game, etc.) depending on the lighting state. In the game board 700, the lighting unit 702a displays "1", the lighting unit 702b displays "2", and the lighting unit 702c displays "3". The gaming machine 10 notifies that the progress is in the first stage by, for example, setting the lighting unit 702a in the lighting state and the lighting unit 702b and the lighting unit 702c in the extinguishing state, and lights the lighting unit 702a and the lighting unit 702b. By setting the lighting unit 702c to the lighting state, it is notified that the progress status is the second stage, and by setting the lighting units 702a to 702c to the lighting state, the progress status is the third stage (for example, the production is started). It is just before the event).

The lighting units 702a to 702c may be configured to be movable (for example, rotateable or swingable). In this case, the gaming machine 10 can more easily grasp that the lighting state (lighting / extinguishing) has changed by moving the lighting units 702a to 702c when switching from extinguishing to lighting.

The logo display unit 703 is composed of a plurality of characters (plurality of constituent units) for displaying the product name (product name, brand, etc.) of the gaming machine 10. Each component of the logo display unit 703 is configured so that it can be lit in a plurality of lighting colors (for example, it is composed of LEDs), and the logo display unit 703 displays information about the game (progress of the game, etc.) depending on the lighting state. Notify.

In the game board 700, the logo display unit 703 is composed of seven constituent parts (characters) of "A", "B", "C", "D", "E", "F", and "G", and each component is lit. Is configured to be controllable.

For example, the logo display unit 703 turns off all the components at the start of the effect, increases the number of components in the lit state as the effect progresses, and sets all the components in the lit state at the end timing of the effect. By doing so, the progress status of the game (progress status of the production) is notified. In the logo display unit 703, all the components are turned off at the start of the effect, the number of the components in the lit state is increased as the effect progresses, and all the components are turned on only in the case of a big hit. Then, the progress status of the game (progress status of the production) may be notified.

The first board effect device 704 performs the effect of the game by operating. In the game board 700, the first board effect device 704 has a gourd-like shape. The first board effect device 704 is provided on the left side of the display device 41, and as shown in FIG. 81, the upper portion can be tilted toward the display device 41 and can operate up to a position where the upper portion is superimposed on the front side of the display device 41. It has become.

The second board production devices 705L and 705R perform the production of the game by operating. In the game board 700, the second board effect device 705L is arranged (for example, stored so as not to be visible) at a position that does not overlap with the display device 41 on the upper left side of the display device 41 in the normal state (during non-operation). At the time of operation, as shown in FIG. 82, it appears at the upper left of the display device 41, and it is possible to operate so that the front side of the display device 41 extends from the upper left of the display device 41 toward the center of the display device 41. Further, the second board effect device 705R is arranged at a position (for example, stored so as not to be visible) so as not to overlap with the display device 41 on the upper right side of the display device 41 during normal operation (non-operation), and FIG. 82 is shown during operation. As shown in the above, it appears at the upper right of the display device 41, and can be operated so as to extend the front side of the display device 41 toward the center of the display device 41 from the upper right of the display device 41.

The third board effect device 706 produces a game by operating. In the game board 700, the third board effect device 706 is arranged (stored) on the back side of the second display device 701 during normal operation (non-operation), and during operation, the display device 41 of the display device 41 is arranged (stored). Appearing above, the front side of the display device 41 can be operated from above the display device 41 toward the center of the display device 41.

In the game board 700, the second board effect device 705L, 705R and the third board effect device 706 are connected to each other in a state of operating in the central portion, and the three board effect devices are integrally formed to form a predetermined shape. It is configured to be possible.

The fourth board effect device 707 produces a game by operating. The fourth board effect device 707 is a character shape related to the effect of the gaming machine 10. In the game board 700, the fourth board effect device 707 is arranged (for example, stored so as not to be visible) at a position that does not overlap with the display device 41 on the lower left side of the display device 41 in the normal state (non-movable). During operation, as shown in FIG. 82, it appears on the front side of the lower part of the display device 41, and the front side of the lower part of the display device 41 can be operated left and right. The 4th board effect device 707 may be capable of operating the weapon held by the character, and in addition to the operation in the left-right direction, the operation in the vertical direction and the operation of tilting the character are possible. You may.

The above is an example of the gaming board 700 of the gaming machine 10 in the third embodiment. Next, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment.

The display screen 708 has two sets of decorative symbols (large symbol group 709, small symbol group 710), special figure 1 hold number display 711, special figure 2 hold number display 712, hold display 713, and hold digestion display 714. And the hold digestion pedestal display 715 and the notice display 716 are included in the display contents.

The two sets of decorative symbols include a large symbol group 709 as the first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 710 as the second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 709 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving the interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 709 is displayed large in the substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 709 includes the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R. The left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

Generally, the large symbol group 709 starts to change in the order of the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 709 forms a reach mode with the left symbol 709L and the right symbol 709R, and waits for the middle symbol 709C to stop to form a hit mode.

The small symbol group 710 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 710 is displayed small on the peripheral edge of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display effect of the large symbol group 709. The small symbol group 710 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 710 of the display screen 708 indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

The special figure 1 hold number display 711 displays the hold storage number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 712 displays the hold storage number of the special figure 2 game. The hold display 713 can clearly indicate the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game and notify the reliability (expectation degree) of the game result for each hold storage according to the display mode. The hold memory indicates the right to execute the special figure variable display game. For example, the hold display 713 changes the display mode (character) of the hold storage display (hold storage display displaying the hold storage) corresponding to each hold storage (for example, when the reliability is high, the general-purpose character to the dedicated character). The reliability of the game result is notified by changing to). In addition, the hold display 713 is a game depending on the operation mode (for example, the character is normally set to the walking mode and the character is set to the running mode when the reliability is high) instead of the change of the display mode of the hold storage display. The reliability of the result may be notified.

The hold digestion display 714 can indicate the variable state of the special figure variation display game and notify the reliability of the game result depending on the display mode. In FIG. 83, the hold digestion display 714 indicates that the special figure variation display game is in the process of symbol variation. For example, the hold digestion display 714 trusts the game result by changing the display mode (character) of the hold storage display corresponding to the hold storage (for example, changing from a general-purpose character to a dedicated character when the reliability is high). Notify the degree. In addition, the hold digestion display 714 changes depending on the operation mode (for example, the character is set to the walking mode at normal times, and the character is set to the running mode when the reliability is high) instead of the change of the display mode of the hold storage display. The reliability of the game result may be notified.

The hold digestion pedestal display 715 clearly indicates the position where the hold digestion display 714 is displayed. The hold digestion pedestal display 715 includes a character display and a pedestal display. The character display displays a character that is a motif of the effect performed by the gaming machine 10. In FIG. 83, the character display displays a character like a tiger. The pedestal display displays a scaffold on which the hold storage display (character) corresponding to the hold memory during digestion and the character displayed by the character display are located.

The notice display 716 gives notice of the effect (giving privilege) performed by the hold storage during standby or the hold memory during digestion. The notice display 716 displays a treasure chest and a gourd, and is an effect corresponding to an item (symbol) to be displayed at the time of digestion of the pending memory during standby or the pending memory during digestion (a mode like a treasure box in FIG. 83). It is notified that the effect corresponding to the item of the above and the effect corresponding to the item of the mode such as gourd) will be performed. The notice display 716 is hidden when the item is not in stock.

The item displayed on the notice display 716 is added by opening the baggage at the start of digestion of the hold memory (the hold memory display in the form of the character holding the baggage) displayed in the form of holding the baggage. The luggage will appear at a predetermined timing. The luggage may appear from the timing (at the start of display) when the hold storage display starts to be displayed on the hold display 713, or may appear from the middle.

Next, the relationship between the items appearing from the luggage and the effect (privilege to be given) to be performed will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the items appearing from the luggage and the contents thereof in the third embodiment.

Items that appear from the luggage are patterns P1 to P5. The item of the pattern P1 is an item (symbol) having an aspect like a skull. The item of the pattern P1 clearly indicates that it is a ghost (the effect of opening the baggage is a failure (fanning effect)). When an item of pattern P1 appears from the luggage, the item is not stocked (added) on the notice display 716.

The item of the pattern P2 is an item having a heart-like shape. The item of the pattern P2 clearly shows that the effect PT acquisition effect of acquiring the effect PT (points) is performed in either the hold memory during digestion or the hold memory during standby. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the right to execute the effect can be acquired by accumulating the effect PT up to a predetermined value. When an item of pattern P2 appears from the baggage, an item having a heart-like shape is stocked on the notice display 716.

The item of the pattern P3 is an item having a mode like a gourd. The item of the pattern P3 clearly indicates that the effect PT acquisition effect is performed in either the hold memory during digestion or the hold memory during standby. When an item of pattern P3 appears from the baggage, an item having a mode like a gourd is stocked on the notice display 716.

The item of the pattern P4 is an item having an aspect indicating a push button (PB) (an item having an aspect of a push button). The item of pattern P4 uses a push button (accompanied by the operation of the push button) in either the hold memory during digestion or the hold memory during standby. By doing so, it is clearly shown that the production) will be performed as if the variable display game was performed multiple times. When an item having the pattern P4 appears from the luggage, the item in the form of indicating a push button is stocked on the notice display 716. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button executed based on the item of the mode indicating the push button may be a dedicated effect different from the effect using the push button performed independently of the item.

The item of pattern P5 is an item shaped like a treasure chest. The item of the pattern P5 clearly indicates that the opening effect of the treasure box (the effect that the item appears from the inside of the treasure box being opened) is performed in either the pending storage during digestion or the pending storage. When an item of pattern P5 appears from the luggage, the item in the form of a treasure box is stocked on the notice display 716.

Next, the items appearing from the treasure chest will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the items appearing from the treasure chest and the contents thereof in the third embodiment.
Items appearing from the treasure box in the opening effect of the treasure box are patterns P10 to P14. The item of the pattern P10 is an item having an aspect like a skull. It is clearly shown that the item of pattern P10 is a ghost (it does not develop from the treasure box opening effect). If an item with pattern P10 appears from the treasure chest while the hold memory is being digested (during the special figure fluctuation display game), the effect related to the appearing item will not be performed after the opening effect of the treasure box is completed. ..

The item of the pattern P11 is an item having a heart-like shape. It is clearly shown that the item of the pattern P11 develops into the production PT acquisition production. If an item with pattern P11 appears from the treasure box while the hold memory is being digested (during the special figure change display game), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the effect PT acquisition effect is produced in the special figure change display game. Is done.

The item of the pattern P12 is an item having a mode like a gourd. It is clearly shown that the item of the pattern P12 develops into the production PT acquisition production. If an item with pattern P12 appears from the treasure box while the hold memory is being digested (during the special figure change display game), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the effect PT acquisition effect is produced in the special figure change display game. Is done.

The item of the pattern P13 is an item of a mode in which the character of continuation is displayed. It is clearly shown that the item of the pattern P13 develops into a pseudo-continuous production. If an item with pattern P13 appears from the treasure box while the hold memory is being digested (during the special figure change display game), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the special figure change display game. It is carried out.

The item of the pattern P14 is an item in a mode of displaying the characters of intense heat. Items with pattern P14 are shown to be reliable (eg, 60%). If an item with pattern P14 appears from the treasure box while the hold memory is being digested (during the special figure change display game), the reliability is high in the special figure change display game after the opening effect of the treasure box is completed. The production is done.

Next, an example of the production of the variable display game executed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. FIG. 86 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 87 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 88 is a diagram (No. 4) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment.

The display screen 717 shown in FIG. 86 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol variation is stopped (the variation display game is stopped), and shows a state in which there are no items stocked in the notice display 716.
On the display screen 717, the notice display 716 is in a non-display state because there are no items stocked in the notice display 716. Further, on the display screen 717, since the symbol fluctuation is stopped, the hold storage display is not displayed on the hold digestion display 714. Further, on the display screen 717, the hold storage display in the form of holding the luggage is located at the first (head) in the hold display 713, and when the digestion of the next hold storage is started, the item appears from the luggage. It is clearly stated.

The display screen 718 shown in FIG. 86 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 717, and shows a state in which the holding memory displayed in the mode of holding a baggage has started digestion (a state in which the symbol change has started). show. On the display screen 718, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 718, each hold memory display slides one from the state on the display screen 717, and the hold memory display in the form of holding the luggage that was first located in the hold display 713 is located in the hold digestion display 714. It is shown that the special figure variation display game corresponding to the hold memory displayed in the mode of holding the baggage has been started.

The display screen 719 shown in FIG. 86 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 718, and shows a state in which the opening effect of opening the baggage is being executed. The display screen 719 is a state in which an item of pattern P4 (a mode of a push button) appears from the baggage of the hold memory display displayed on the hold digestion display 714, and is a hold memory during digestion or a hold memory during standby. It is clearly shown that pseudo-continuous production using push buttons is performed in any of the special figure fluctuation display games. Further, on the display screen 719, the message "Thank you for the tribute!" Is displayed from the characters constituting the hold digestion pedestal display 715, thereby clearly indicating that the item is advantageous to the player.

The display screen 720 shown in FIG. 87 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 719, and is a state in which items appearing from the luggage are newly stocked in the notice display 716. On the display screen 720, since the item to be stocked appears, the notice display 716 is in the display state, and the notice display 716 in the display state displays the item in the form of a push button that appears from the luggage. Then, on the display screen 720, as the item appears from the baggage, the mode of the hold memory display for displaying the hold memory during digestion is changed from the mode with the baggage to the mode without the baggage. The gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing the push button (does not accept the input) while it is in the notice display 716.

The display screen 721 shown in FIG. 87 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 720, and is independent of the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button announced by the notice display 716 in the special figure variation display game (independent). The state in which the effect using the push button to be performed is occurring is shown.

The display screen 721 includes the effect display 722 as the display content. The effect display 722 displays the effect executed in the special figure variation display game. On the display screen 721, the effect display 722 includes an image showing how the push button is pressed (an image prompting the operation of the push button), a message "press !!" (a message prompting the operation of the push button), and the rest. A timer indicating the time is displayed, and it is clearly shown that the effect of using the push button (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed in the special figure variation display game. On the display screen 721, the stock state (stocked items) of the notice display 716 has not changed from the stock state (stocked items) of the notice display 716 on the display screen 720. As a result, the display screen 721 is not the effect that the effect display 722 is foretelling in the notice display 716, that is, the effect using the push button being executed is irrelevant to the item in the form of the push button stocked in the notice display 716. It shows that.

Then, in the gaming machine 10, the player presses the push button (operation) while the display screen 721 is being displayed (when the effect using the push button is executed on the effect display 722 while the push button item is being displayed on the notice display 716). ), Only the operation (input by pressing) for the effect display 722 is valid (priority is given to the effect using the push button displayed by the effect display 722). That is, the gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing the item in the form of the push button stocked in the notice display 716.

In this way, since the gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing when it is displayed in the notice display 716, it does not cause a mixture of operations. Therefore, when the push button item is displayed on the notice display 716, the item is displayed with the item. There is no need to set restrictions such as prohibiting the performance of effects using push buttons that are performed independently. That is, the gaming machine 10 can secure the degree of freedom of the production (prevent the degree of freedom from decreasing) even during the advance notice, and can improve the interest.

In this case, the gaming machine 10 may change the display mode (for example, gray scale) of the item in the push button mode displayed on the notice display 716 to clearly indicate that the input by pressing is invalid. good.

The display screen 723 shown in FIG. 87 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 721, and shows a state in which the special figure variation display game has ended and the symbol variation has stopped.
On the display screen 723, the effect that the item stocked in the notice display 716 is not foretold in the special figure fluctuation display game being executed on the display screen 721 is not performed (the stocked item is not consumed). Since the variable display game has ended, the stock state of the notice display 716 is the same as the stock state of the display screen 721.

The display screen 724 shown in FIG. 88 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 723, and shows a state in which digestion of a new reserved memory is started (a state in which fluctuation is started). On the display screen 724, each hold storage display slides by one from the state on the display screen 723, and the hold storage display located at the first position of the hold display 713 on the display screen 723 is located on the hold digestion display 714, and the hold is concerned. A special figure variation display game corresponding to the memory display has started.

The display screen 725 shown in FIG. 88 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 724, and is in a state in which an effect corresponding to an item (an item in the form of a push button) stocked in the notice display 716 has been started. Is shown.

On the display screen 725, the items in the form of push buttons stocked in the notice display 716 are moving from the inside of the notice display 716 toward the center of the screen while expanding. As a result, the display screen 725 clearly indicates that the effect to be started from now on is the effect (pseudo-continuous effect using the push button) that the item in the mode of the push button has foretold.

The display screen 726 shown in FIG. 88 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 725, and is in a state in which an effect corresponding to an item (an item in the form of a push button) stocked in the notice display 716 is being executed. Is shown.

On the display screen 726, as the effect display 722, an image showing how the push button is pressed, a message "press !!", and a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed, and the effect using the push button in the special figure variation display game is displayed. It is clearly indicated that (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed. On the display screen 726, the effect that the item stocked in the notice display 716 is foretelling is executed (the item in stock is consumed), and the notice is given when the item stocked in the notice display 716 is exhausted. The display 716 is hidden.

Next, in the pseudo-continuous production using the push button executed based on the item of the push button mode stocked in the notice display 716, the case where the input is made by pressing the push button and the case where the input is not made by pressing the push button. An example of the content of the production performed in the above will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of the effect contents performed when the push button is pressed and when the push button is not pressed in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button in the third embodiment.

For example, as shown in FIG. 89A, when the gaming machine 10 does not input by pressing the push button in the pseudo-ream effect using the push button (when it is not pressed), the gaming machine 10 has a normal mode of pseudo-ream. (Normal pseudo-ream) is executed, and when an input is made by pressing the push button in the production using the push button, the pseudo-ream (dedicated pseudo-ream) prepared exclusively for the pseudo-ream effect using the push button is executed. That is, the gaming machine 10 uses the push button to select the type of the pseudo-ream in the pseudo-ream effect using the push button.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the gaming machine 10 fluctuates at high speed (display screen) when no input is made by pressing the push button (when the push button is not pressed) in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button. (Variation shown in 720) is continued, and when an input is made by pressing the push button in an effect using the push button, a pseudo-ream is executed. That is, the gaming machine 10 uses the push button to select whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button.

Next, the setting process of the luggage to be displayed on the hold storage display will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the luggage setting process according to the third embodiment.
The baggage setting process is a process performed when the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 newly generates a hold memory, that is, when a winning command indicating that a hold memory is newly generated is received. The baggage setting process is, for example, a process executed by the control unit in step D23 of the main process.

[Step D300] The control unit is an effect for which the effect executed by the newly generated hold memory based on the winning command is subject to the advance notice (the effect of executing the effect notified as the notice in the special figure variation display game). It is determined whether or not it is. The control unit proceeds to step D301 when it is determined to execute the effect subject to the advance notice, and proceeds to step D307 when it is determined not to execute the effect subject to the advance notice.

[Step D301] The control unit determines whether or not there is a hold memory displayed in a mode of holding a baggage in the hold memory. The control unit proceeds to step D302 when it is determined that there is a hold memory displayed in the mode of carrying the luggage, and step D304 when it is determined that the hold memory displayed in the mode of the character carrying the luggage does not exist. Proceed to.

[Step D302] The control unit determines whether or not the contents of the hold storage baggage displayed in the mode of holding the baggage can be replaced. For example, the control unit determines that the replacement is possible when the pattern P1 is set as the content of the cargo, and determines that the replacement is not possible when the pattern P1 is set as the content other than the pattern P1. In addition, the priority is set for each pattern, the priority of the pattern before replacement is compared with the priority of the pattern after replacement, and it is determined that the replacement is possible when the priority of the pattern after replacement is high. You may.

The control unit proceeds to step D303 when it is determined that the contents of the luggage can be replaced, and proceeds to step D304 when it is determined that the contents of the luggage cannot be replaced.
[Step D303] The control unit replaces the contents of the baggage with the pattern of the item corresponding to the effect to be the target of the advance notice executed by the newly generated hold storage.

[Step D304] The control unit sets the luggage as the display mode of the hold storage display corresponding to any of the hold storages (newly generated hold storage or standby hold storage) (the luggage is set as the display mode of the hold storage display). Set the character you have).

[Step D305] The control unit sets, as the contents of the baggage set in step D304, the pattern of the item corresponding to the effect to be the target of the advance notice to be executed by the newly generated hold storage.

[Step D306] The control unit determines whether or not the luggage has been set as the display mode of the hold storage display corresponding to the newly generated hold storage. When the control unit determines that the luggage has not been set as the display mode of the hold storage display corresponding to the newly generated hold storage, the control unit proceeds to step D307 and displays the hold storage display corresponding to the newly generated hold storage. If it is determined that the baggage has already been set as an aspect, the baggage setting process is terminated.

[Step D307] The control unit determines whether or not it is the generation timing of the baggage containing the skull. For example, the control unit generates a random number, and when the random number shows a predetermined value, it determines that it is the generation timing of the baggage containing the skull.

The control unit proceeds to step D308 when it is determined that it is the timing of occurrence of the baggage containing the skull, and ends the baggage setting process when it is determined that it is not the timing of the occurrence of the baggage containing the skull.

[Step D308] The control unit sets a baggage as a display mode of the hold storage display corresponding to the newly generated hold memory (a character having a baggage is set as a display mode of the hold memory display).

[Step D309] The control unit sets pattern P1 or pattern P5 (a treasure box containing a skull) as the contents of the baggage set in step D304, and ends the baggage setting process.

The above is the third embodiment. In this way, the gaming machine 10 predicts the progress of the effect by notifying in advance that the effect using the push button on the advance notice display 716 will be performed by either the hold memory during digestion or the hold memory during standby. It is possible to maintain and improve expectations.

The gaming machine 10 has different hold storages for the hold memory for causing the item to appear and the hold memory for executing the effect announced by the item, so that the player cannot grasp the timing when the effect announced by the item occurs. According to this, the gaming machine 10 gives a feeling of expectation that the effect announced by the item may occur even at the time of digestion of the reserved memory that is digested before the reserved memory that performs the announced effect. Can be done. That is, the gaming machine 10 can maintain and improve the expectation even for the production that is not the target of the advance notice.

Further, the gaming machine 10 can prevent oversight (forgetting to operate) of the effect and improve the interest by notifying in advance that the effect using the push button or the like will start by the advance notice display 716.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 has been described as not accepting input by pressing the push button item in the notice display 716, but the present invention is not limited to this. The gaming machine 10 may invalidate the input by pressing during the execution of the effect using the push button, which is performed independently of the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button, and when the input by pressing is performed at other timings, the input may be invalidated. As a reserved input, the input may be accepted before the start of the pseudo-continuous production. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the game machine 10 from missing the effect due to forgetting to press it.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 92. FIG. 91 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the first modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 92 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the first modification of the third embodiment.

The display screen 727 shown in FIG. 91 (1) shows a display screen during symbol variation (variation display game is being executed). On the display screen 727, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed.

The display screen 728 shown in FIG. 91 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 727, and shows a state immediately before the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 728, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L fluctuates at low speed. That is, the display screen 728 clearly indicates that the left symbol 709L is to be temporarily stopped.

The display screen 729 shown in FIG. 91 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 728, and shows a state in which the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 729, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, the left symbol 709L temporarily stops at "5", and the symbols swing.

The display screen 730 shown in FIG. 92 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 729, and shows a state in which the effect is generated on the left symbol 709L.
On the display screen 730, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. Further, on the display screen 730, an image of the push button and an effect indicating the occurrence of the effect are displayed as the effect display 722 on the portion superimposed on the number (identifier) of the temporarily stopped left symbol 709L.

The display screen 731 shown in FIG. 92 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 730, and shows a state in which an effect using a push button is started.
On the display screen 731, as the effect display 722, an image showing how the push button is pressed, a message "press !!", and a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed, and the effect using the push button in the special figure variation display game is displayed. It is clearly indicated that (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed.

The above is the production performed in the first modification of the third embodiment. Generally, when a symbol is temporarily stopped in a variable display game, the player puts the temporarily stopped drawing in the field of view (visually). Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers constituting the temporarily stopped symbol immediately after the temporary stop, and uses the push button after notifying that the effect of using the push button is to be performed. By starting the effect, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize that the effect using the push button is started. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from overlooking the effect of using the push button, and can improve the interest.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
In the first modification of the third embodiment, the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the number of the symbol temporarily stopped after the temporary stop (changed to the symbol displaying the push button), and the effect of using the push button is performed. It started. In the second modification of the third embodiment, the changing symbol is replaced with a symbol that displays a push button (for example, a symbol that is arranged by superimposing the push button on the front side of the number), and the symbol that displays the push button is replaced. After the temporary stop, the production using the push button is started.

Here, the effect performed in the second modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the second modification of the third embodiment.

The display screen 732 shown in FIG. 93 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 728, and shows a state immediately before the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 732, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L fluctuates at low speed. Further, on the display screen 732, the left symbol 709L (the left symbol 709L in which the number is replaced with the symbol displaying the push button) in which the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbol is to be temporarily stopped (low speed). It is fluctuating). That is, the display screen 732 clearly indicates that the left symbol 709L is about to temporarily stop with the image of the push button displayed on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbol.

The display screen 733 shown in FIG. 93 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 732, and shows a state in which the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 733, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L temporarily stops and swings while displaying the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbol.

The display screen 734 shown in FIG. 93 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 733, and shows a state in which an effect using a push button is started.
On the display screen 734, as the effect display 722, an image showing how the push button is pressed, a message "press !!", and a timer indicating the remaining time are displayed, and the effect using the push button in the special figure variation display game is displayed. It is clearly indicated that (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed.

The above is the production performed in the second modification of the third embodiment. Generally, in a variable display game, the player sees (visually sees) a drawing that temporarily stops. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 displays the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers constituting the temporarily stopped symbol immediately before the temporary stop (low-speed fluctuation state), and displays the image of the push button on the front side of the numbers constituting the symbol. By temporarily stopping the image while displaying it and notifying that the effect using the push button is to be performed, the player is more surely aware that the effect using the push button is started by starting the effect using the push button. Can be made to. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from overlooking the effect of using the push button, and can improve the interest.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
Next, the effects performed in the third modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect in the third modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 95 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the third modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the third modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 97 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the third modification of the third embodiment.

First, the flow of the effect will be described using the timing chart of FIG. The timing chart shown in FIG. 94 is an example of the pseudo-ream effect executed by the gaming machine 10, and shows the flow of the effect when the pseudo-ream is executed three times.

As shown in FIG. 94, the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth variation display game using the music A as BGM (Back Ground Music) at the timing t10. Then, when the Nth variation display game is started, the gaming machine 10 executes the variation display effect (first pseudo-ream). An example of a display screen during the variable display effect (first pseudo-ream) will be described with reference to the display screen 735 of FIG. 95 (1) and the display screen 736 of FIG. 95 (2).

The display screen 735 shown in FIG. 95 (1) shows the display screen during the variable display effect (first pseudo-ream). On the display screen 735, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays the BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 735.

The display screen 736 shown in FIG. 95 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 735, and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (first pseudo-ream). On the display screen 736, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is about to be temporarily stopped at the symbol "7" (low-speed fluctuation), and the middle symbol 709C fluctuates at high speed. is doing. That is, the display screen 736 is trying to derive the reach state. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays the BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 736, and operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R to arouse the expectation of reach generation and improve the interest. I'm trying.

The gaming machine 10 starts an effect (pseudo-ream continuation effect) of notifying the player whether or not to continue the pseudo-ream when the two symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable display effect (pseudo-ream first time) at the timing t11. .. At this time, the gaming machine 10 reduces the volume while playing the music A to mute (silence), and reproduces the SE (Sound Effect) used for the pseudo-continuous continuous production.

In the pseudo-ream continuation effect, the gaming machine 10 notifies the player that the pseudo-ream will be continued when the pseudo-ream is continued, and shifts to a state in which the three symbols are fluctuated at high speed (variable display state). .. On the other hand, when the pseudo-ream is not continued, the gaming machine 10 shifts to the result derivation display or the like which notifies that the pseudo-ream is not continued and derives the result of the variable display game.

(2) A screen display example during the temporary stop of the symbol (pseudo continuous effect) will be described with reference to the display screen 737 of FIG. 95 (3).
The display screen 737 shown in FIG. 95 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 736, and shows a display screen during the temporary stop of two symbols (pseudo-continuous continuous effect). On the display screen 737, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol "6", and the middle symbol 709C is fluctuating at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 puts the BGM in a mute state and plays SE instead of the BGM in accordance with the pseudo-continuous continuous effect being executed on the display screen 737, so that the player can grasp that the effect is occurring and feel the expectation. To improve the taste of the game.

When the gaming machine 10 notifies the timing t12 that the pseudo-ream is continued, the gaming machine 10 executes a variable display effect (second time). The gaming machine 10 stops the playback of the SE and starts (returning) the volume of the muted music A (BGM) to a predetermined volume. An example of a display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-ream) will be described with reference to the display screen 738 of FIG. 96 (1), the display screen 739 of FIG. 96 (2), and the display screen 740 of FIG. 96 (3).

The display screen 738 shown in FIG. 96 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 737, and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-ream). On the display screen 738, a tiger-like character and a message "The game is about to begin!" Are displayed as the effect display 722, and the effect of the special figure variation display game is continued (re-variation starts). It is clearly stated. Further, the gaming machine 10 operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 738 to change the effect, thereby improving the interest. Then, the gaming machine 10 stops the SE being reproduced on the display screen 737, and plays the BGM that has been muted at a predetermined volume.

The display screen 739 shown in FIG. 96 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 738, and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-ream). On the display screen 739, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays the BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 739.

The display screen 740 shown in FIG. 96 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 739, and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-ream). On the display screen 740, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is about to be temporarily stopped at the symbol "7" (low-speed fluctuation), and the middle symbol 709C fluctuates at high speed. is doing. That is, the display screen 740 is trying to derive the reach state. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays the BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 740, and operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R to arouse the expectation of reach generation and improve the interest. I'm trying.

The gaming machine 10 starts the pseudo-ream continuous effect when the two symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable display effect (second pseudo-ream) at the timing t13. At this time, the gaming machine 10 reduces the volume while playing the music A (BGM) to mute (silence), and reproduces the SE used for the pseudo-continuous continuous production. (2) A screen display example during the temporary stop of the symbol (pseudo-continuous continuous effect) will be described with reference to the display screen 741 of FIG. 97 (1).

The display screen 741 shown in FIG. 97 (1) is a display screen after the display screen 740, and shows a display screen during the temporary stop of two symbols (pseudo continuous effect).
On the display screen 741, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol "6", and the middle symbol 709C is fluctuating at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 puts the BGM in a mute state and plays SE instead of the BGM in accordance with the pseudo-continuous continuous effect being executed on the display screen 741, so that the player can grasp that the effect is occurring and feel the expectation. To improve the taste of the game.

When the gaming machine 10 notifies the timing t14 that the pseudo-ream will be continued, the gaming machine 10 executes a variable display effect (third time). The gaming machine 10 stops the playback of the SE and starts playing (returning) the volume of the muted music A (BGM) at a predetermined volume. An example of a display screen during the variable display effect (third pseudo-ream) will be described with reference to the display screen 742 of FIG. 97 (2) and the display screen 743 of FIG. 97 (3).

The display screen 742 shown in FIG. 97 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 741 and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (third pseudo-ream). On the display screen 742, a tiger-like character and a message "I'll decide next!" Are displayed as the effect display 722, and the effect of the special figure variation display game is continued (re-variation starts). Is clearly stated. Further, the gaming machine 10 operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 742 to change the effect, thereby improving the interest. Then, the gaming machine 10 stops the SE being reproduced on the display screen 741 and plays the BGM that has been muted at a predetermined volume.

The display screen 743 shown in FIG. 97 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 742, and shows the display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-ream). On the display screen 743, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays the BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 743.

The gaming machine 10 executes the variation display effect (third time) up to the timing t15, derives the result of the variation display game (result derivation display), and displays the result for a predetermined time to play the Nth special figure variation display game. finish.

The above is the flow of the production in the modified example 3 of the third embodiment. As described above, in the case where the SE and the BGM are not mixed when the SE is reproduced, the gaming machine 10 does not put the BGM in the stopped state but puts the BGM in the mute state. As a result, when the gaming machine 10 raises the volume of the BGM after the reproduction of the SE is completed, the BGM can be heard from the reproduction position where the reproduction time of the SE has elapsed. By making it possible to hear the BGM from the playback position where the playback time of the SE is desired to elapse in this way, the gaming machine 10 prevents the BGM from being heard in pieces, suppresses the discomfort felt by the player, and improves the interest. can.

[Modification 4 of the third embodiment]
Next, a modification 4 of the third embodiment will be described. First, the decorative design used in the modified example 4 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern in the modified example 4 of the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 uses decorative symbols A and decorative symbols B as decorative symbols used for each symbol of the large symbol group 709. The decorative symbol A is a decorative symbol mainly used, and the decorative symbol B is a decorative symbol used as a slave (a decorative symbol used only in a specific case). More specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the decorative symbol B is used only when a big hit is derived in the special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) generated by winning a prize at the special figure 2 starting port. It is a design to be played.

The decorative symbol A includes symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750. The symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes.

The symbol 744 is a symbol that displays the number "1" composed of a number element (identifier) having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "1". The symbol 745 is a symbol that displays the number "2" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "2". The symbol 746 is a symbol that displays the number "3" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "3". The symbol 747 is a symbol that displays the number "4" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "4". The symbol 748 is a symbol that displays the number "5" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "5". The symbol 749 is a symbol that displays the number "6" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "6". The symbol 750 is a symbol that displays the number "7" composed of numerical elements having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "7".

The decorative symbol B is a symbol having the same discriminating power as the numerical element in the decorative symbol A, and for example, a character element (value conversion identifier) indicating that the numerical element in the decorative symbol A has a higher value than the decorative symbol A. It is an added form (a form in which a character element is added to the design 750). That is, in the gaming machine 10, the jackpot derived from the decorative symbol B (symbol 751) has a relatively higher value than the jackpot derived from the decorative symbol A (symbol 750).

The decorative symbol B includes the symbol 751. The symbol 751 has a numerical element (identifier) having distinctiveness as a symbol by the number "7" and a character element indicating that the symbol 750 has a higher value than the symbol 750 consisting of only the numerical element of the number "7" by the character "pole". It is a pattern composed of and.

Next, the game state in which the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B are used will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a symbol used in the gaming state in the modified example 4 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 99, the game machine 10 has a different symbol from the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 variable display game) generated by winning a prize at the special figure 1 starting port and the special figure 2 variable display game. ing.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbol used during the fluctuation and temporary stop of the special figure 1 variable display game is composed of the decorative symbol A. That is, the gaming machine 10 displays the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in order in the special figure 1 variation display game, the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, so that the game machine 10 fluctuates at high speed. The left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C are temporarily stopped by any of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750, and the temporarily stopped state is displayed.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbol used while the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped is composed of the decorative symbol A. That is, the gaming machine 10 stops any of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in the special figure 1 variable display game, and the derivation result is obtained. Is displayed.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbol used during the variable and temporary stop of the special figure 2 variable display game is composed of the decorative symbol A. That is, in the special figure 2 variation display game, the gaming machine 10 displays symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750 in order on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, thereby fluctuating at high speed. The left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C are temporarily stopped by any of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750, and the temporarily stopped state is displayed.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbol used while the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped is composed of the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B. That is, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the gaming machine 10 stops any of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750,751 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. Display the derivation result.

More specifically, when the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of symbols 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game, the game machine 10 has symbols 744,745,746,747,748 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. , 749, 750 are displayed in order to perform high-speed fluctuation, and one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 479, 750 is temporarily stopped on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. After that, the symbol 751 is stopped at the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, in other cases (when the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is not derived), the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C have symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750. Is displayed in order to perform high-speed fluctuation, and after temporarily stopping any of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, the left symbol One of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 is stopped at the 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and the derivation result is displayed.

Hereinafter, in the game machine 10, in the special figure 2 variation display game, the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is derived instead of the jackpot consisting of the symbol 750. That is, in the gaming machine 10, it is assumed that the big hit consisting of the symbols 750 does not occur in the special figure 2 variable display game.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A (a symbol without character elements) during fluctuation and stop, and is decorated only when the special figure 2 variable display game derives a jackpot using the symbol 751. By using symbol B (a symbol with a character element), it is possible to easily grasp that the jackpot consisting of symbol 751 is a special jackpot (high-value jackpot), improve the understanding of the game, and improve the interest. Can be done.

Further, since the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A used during the fluctuation and the stop in the special figure 2 variable display game, the video and the like used during the fluctuation and the stop are displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game. It can be shared with the video, etc. in the above, and it is possible to suppress the increase in capacity, etc. and the time and effort involved in preparing the video.

Next, the case of deriving the jackpot consisting of the symbol 750 in the special figure 1 variable display game and the case of deriving the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a comparison between the case where “777” is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game and the case where “777” is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game in the modified example 4 of the third embodiment. ..

First, a case of deriving a jackpot consisting of symbols 750 in the special figure 1 variable display game will be described. The gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of a symbol 750 when the batch display device derives “●●● 〇 ● 〇〇 ●” in the special figure 1 variable display game. When the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 750, the gaming machine 10 grants "4R" to the player as a privilege. The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C from the symbol 750. To derive the jackpot.

Next, a case of deriving a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. The gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 when the batch display device derives “●●● 〇 ● 〇〇 ●” in the special figure 2 variable display game. When the game machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751, it grants "16R" as a privilege to the player (gives a higher value than the jackpot consisting of the symbol 750 "777"). The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C to the symbol 751. By replacing it, a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is derived.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, when different values (rounds) are given by the symbols displaying the same identifier, the symbols of the same embodiment are used in the temporary stop mode (result derivation process), but only when the result is derived. By using symbols of different modes (symbol 750, symbol 751) that display the same identifier, it is possible to easily grasp that the value of the jackpot consisting of each symbol is different, the degree of understanding of the game is improved, and the interest is improved. can.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot consisting of the symbols whose numbers are "7" is changed according to the type of the variable display game being executed (special figure 1 variable display game or special figure 2 variable display game). Therefore, it is possible to standardize the lighting pattern of the jackpot (“●●● 〇 ● 〇〇 ●”) consisting of the symbols whose numbers giving different values are “7” in the batch display device.

Next, the flow of the effect when deriving the jackpot consisting of the symbol 750 in the special figure 1 variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the modified example 4 of the third embodiment.

The display screen 752 shown in FIG. 101 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol variation is stopped (variation display game is stopped), and shows a state before the special figure 1 variation display game is started. On the display screen 752, the left symbol 709L is stopped at "7", the middle symbol 709C is stopped at "3", and the right symbol 709R is stopped at "7". On the display screen 752, the special figure 1 hold number display 711 shows "3", the special figure 2 hold number display 712 shows "0", and there is only the hold memory that triggers the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. , Clarify that the special figure 1 variable display game will be played when the next reserved memory is exhausted.

The display screen 753 shown in FIG. 101 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 752, and shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
On the display screen 753, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 753, the special figure 1 hold number display 711 displaying "3" on the display screen 752 displays "2", and the variable display game being executed is the special figure 1 variable display game. It is shown that.

The display screen 754 shown in FIG. 101 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 753, and shows a state in which the three symbols are temporarily stopped in the special figure 1 variable display game.
On the display screen 754, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), the middle symbol 709C is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and a big hit is derived. It shows the situation just before the event.

The display screen 755 shown in FIG. 101 (4) is a display screen after the display screen 754, and shows a state in which the three symbols are stopped in the special figure 1 variable display game.
On the display screen 755, the left symbol 709L is stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), the middle symbol 709C is stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and the right symbol 709R is stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and is composed of the symbol 750. The jackpot has been derived.

Next, the flow of the effect in deriving the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device in the modified example 4 of the third embodiment.

The display screen 756 shown in FIG. 102 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol variation is stopped (variation display game is stopped), and shows a state before the special figure 2 variation display game is started. On the display screen 756, the left symbol 709L is stopped at "7", the middle symbol 709C is stopped at "3", and the right symbol 709R is stopped at "7". On the display screen 756, the special figure 1 hold number display 711 indicates "0", the special figure 2 hold number display 712 indicates "3", and only the hold memory that triggers the start of the special figure 2 variable display game exists. , Clarify that the special figure 2 variable display game will be played when the next reserved memory is exhausted.

The display screen 757 shown in FIG. 102 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 756, and shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is started.
On the display screen 757, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 757, the special figure 2 hold number display 712 that displayed "3" on the display screen 756 displays "2", and the variable display game being executed is the special figure 2 variable display game. It is shown that.

The display screen 758 shown in FIG. 102 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 757, and shows a state in which the three symbols are temporarily stopped in the special figure 2 variable display game.
On the display screen 758, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), the middle symbol 709C is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 (“7”), and a big hit is derived. It shows the situation just before the event. Further, the gaming machine 10 operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R while the display screen 758 is being displayed to change the effect, thereby arousing the expectation that further changes will occur and improving the interest. There is.

The display screen 759 shown in FIG. 102 (4) is a display screen after the display screen 758, and shows a state in which the three symbols are stopped in the special figure 2 variable display game.
On the display screen 759, the left symbol 709L is replaced from the symbol 750 to the symbol 751, the middle symbol 709C is replaced from the symbol 750 to the symbol 751, and the right symbol 709R is replaced from the symbol 750 to the symbol 751. , A jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 has been derived.

The above is the modification 4 of the third embodiment. It should be noted that the decorative symbol B is said to be a symbol used only when a big hit is derived in the special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) generated by winning a prize at the special figure 2 starting port. No. For example, the gaming machine 10 may use the decorative symbol B (symbol 751) instead of the decorative symbol A (symbol 750) even when the special figure 2 variable display game derives the deviation.

In the game machine 10, it has been described that the big hit consisting of the symbols 750 does not occur in the special figure 2 variable display game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the gaming machine 10 can be configured to be able to derive a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 in addition to the big hit consisting of the symbol 751.

[Variation Example 5 of the Third Embodiment]
Next, a modification 5 of the third embodiment will be described. In the fourth modification of the third embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game can generate a low-value jackpot consisting of symbols 750, and the special figure 2 variable display game can generate a high-value jackpot consisting of symbols 751. The embodiment is described. In the fifth modification of the third embodiment, a jackpot consisting of a low-value symbol 750 and a jackpot consisting of a high-value symbol 751 can be generated in each of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. Will be explained.

First, the symbols used in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a symbol used in the gaming state in the modified example 5 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the gaming machine 10, the same symbol is used in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
In the gaming machine 10, the symbol used during the variable and temporary stop of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is composed of the decorative symbol A. That is, in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the gaming machine 10 has the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C in the order of symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750. The temporary stop state is displayed by temporarily stopping any of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. ..

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used while the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are stopped are composed of the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B. That is, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the gaming machine 10 stops any of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750,751 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. Display the derivation result.

More specifically, when the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751, the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750 are sequentially arranged on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. By displaying it, high-speed fluctuation is performed, and after temporarily stopping any of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, the left symbol 709L, right. The symbol 751 is stopped at the symbol 709R and the middle symbol 709C.
On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, in other cases (when the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is not derived), the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C have symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750. Is displayed in order to perform high-speed fluctuation, and after temporarily stopping any of the symbols 744,745,746,747,748,749,750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, the left symbol One of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 is stopped at the 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and the derivation result is displayed.

Next, the case of deriving the jackpot consisting of the symbol 750 and the case of deriving the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a comparison of two jackpots in the modified example 5 of the third embodiment.

First, a jackpot consisting of symbols 750 derived in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. When the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 750, the gaming machine 10 grants "4R" to the player as a privilege. The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C from the symbol 750. To derive the jackpot.

Next, a jackpot consisting of the symbols 751 derived in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. When the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751, the gaming machine 10 grants "16R" to the player as a privilege. The gaming machine 10 temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and then temporarily stops the symbol 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C to the symbol 751. By replacing it, a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is derived.

The above is the modification 5 of the third embodiment. In this way, the gaming machine 10 has a value from the state in which the symbol 750 is temporarily stopped (when it is suggested that the jackpot of "777" is confirmed) in each of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. By making it possible to generate a jackpot consisting of a low symbol 750 and a jackpot consisting of a high-value symbol 751, it is possible to increase the variation of the jackpot while suppressing an increase in the capacity of the image or the like. Further, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the production until the final stage of the production (even after the temporary stop).

Further, the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol B (the symbol with the character element attached) only when the jackpot is derived, so that the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 is a special jackpot (high-value jackpot). Can be easily grasped, the degree of understanding of the game can be improved, and the interest can be improved.

[Variation Example 6 of the Third Embodiment]
Next, a modification 6 of the third embodiment will be described. In the modified examples 4 and 5 of the third embodiment, an embodiment in which a decorative pattern composed of only numerical elements is used at the time of fluctuation and temporary stop has been described. In the sixth modification of the third embodiment, a case where a symbol including a numerical element, a character element, and the like is used will be described. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a transition of a symbol mode of a decorative symbol in the variable display game of the modification 6 of the third embodiment. In addition, here, a symbol displaying "7" will be used as a representative.

As shown in FIG. 105, when the symbol is stopped (before the start of fluctuation), the gaming machine 10 uses the character symbol 760 (decorative symbol C) as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R. The decorative symbol C includes a character element having distinctiveness as a symbol by a character (for example, a character like a tiger in a symbol displaying the number "7") and a numerical element having distinctiveness as a symbol by a number. It is a symbol composed of inclusions.

When the game machine 10 starts to change the symbol, the symbol used as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R is changed from the character symbol 760 (decorative symbol C) to the character symbol 761 (decorative symbol D). The decorative symbol D has a base (fan) that has distinctiveness as a symbol by a pattern (for example, a pattern of a character like a tiger in a symbol that displays the number "7") and an distinctiveness as a symbol by a number. It is a design including a numerical element.

Then, the gaming machine 10 displays the temporary stop state using the character symbol 761 (decorative symbol D) as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R, and then is derived in the result derivation display (stop state). Depending on the result, the symbols used as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R are changed from the decorative symbol D to the decorative symbol C, the decorative symbol A, or the decorative symbol B.

Specifically, the gaming machine 10 changes the symbol from the decorative symbol D to the decorative symbol C as the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 709R when deriving the outlier, and derives a big hit (for example, 4R). When changing the symbol from decorative symbol D to decorative symbol A as the left symbol 709L, middle symbol 709C, and right symbol 709R and deriving a high-value jackpot (for example, 16R), the left symbol 709L, middle symbol 709C, and right symbol As 709R, the design is changed from the decorative design D to the decorative design B.

According to this, since the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbol A and the decorative symbol B only when the jackpot is derived, the derivation result can be grasped by the symbol mode of the stopped symbol, and the degree of understanding of the game can be improved. It can be enhanced and the interest can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 starts from a state in which the character symbol 761 (decorative symbol D) is temporarily stopped in the jackpot mode (when it is suggested that the jackpot is confirmed), from the jackpot consisting of the low-value symbols 750 and the high-value symbol 751. By making it possible to generate a big hit, it is possible to increase the variation of the big hit while suppressing the increase in the capacity of the video. Further, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the production until the final stage of the production (even after the temporary stop).

The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment described above (including the modified examples 1 to 6) has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41), an operating means (push button 25), and a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The operating means can accept a predetermined operation. The control means has a second operation effect (display) during execution of a reservation effect (display of an item of pattern P4 on the notice display 716) for reserving the first operation effect (effect display 722 of the display screen 726) accompanied by the operation of the operation means. When the effect display 722) on the screen 721 is enabled and the operation of the operation means is received while the reservation effect and the second operation effect are being executed, the second operation effect is prioritized among the first operation effect and the second operation effect. And execute.

(2) When the control means of (1) receives the operation of the operation means at the timing when the reservation effect is being performed and the second operation effect is not being executed, the accepted operation is performed after the start of the first operation effect. Reservation as a reservation operation is accepted.

(3) The control means of (1) changes the mode of the reservation effect during the execution of the reservation effect and the second operation effect.
(4) The display means of (1) displays the hold storage indicating the execution right of the game, and the control means holds the hold memory when there is a game in which the first operation effect to be reserved is performed. The display means is displayed by the reservation effect that the first operation effect is performed in any one of the games (display screen 719).

(5) The control means of (4) performs the reservation effect by using the hold memory for executing the game before the hold memory for executing the game in which the first operation effect is performed.
(6) The control means of (5) changes the display mode of the hold storage for executing the game first in the reservation effect (display screen 719), so that the first operation effect can be performed in any of the games in the hold memory. Display what is being done on the display means.

(7) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41), an operating means (push button 25), and a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The operating means can accept a predetermined operation. When the control means variablely displays the identification information (left symbol 709L, middle symbol 709C, right symbol 709R) in the game, and then displays the operation effect accompanied by the operation by the operation means on the display means after the identification information is variablely displayed. , After displaying the display mode indicating the operation means at the position corresponding to the identification information, control is performed to start the operation effect.

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). When the control means is to output the sound effect in the game when the BGM is played in the game, the volume of the BGM is muted while the sound effect is being output, and the volume of the BGM is turned off after the sound effect is output. Controls to return from the mute state.

(9) The gaming machine 10 includes a display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variable display game). The control means variablely displays the first identification information (decorative symbol A) corresponding to the first value (4R jackpot) in the process of deriving the result of the game (at the time of fluctuation / temporary stop), and at the time of deriving the result of the game (at the time of deriving the result of the game (decorative symbol A). (At the time of stop), the first identification information (decorative symbol A) is given a conversion identifier (character element) for converting the first value into a second value (16R jackpot) larger than the first value. The display means is displayed to stop and display the second identification information (decorative symbol B) corresponding to the value of.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. 106 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the display screen of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the display screen of the fourth embodiment. Here, the display screen is a screen composed of one or a plurality of images displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and in principle, a different reference numeral is given to each display content.

Similar to the display screen 500 shown in FIG. 63 (1), the display screen 800 shown in FIG. 106 (1) is a display screen in which the symbol is stopped, and the symbol is stopped and displayed before the start of the fluctuation in the variation display game. .. The display screen 800 has a large symbol group 801 and a small symbol group 802, a special figure 1 hold number display 803, a special figure 2 hold number display 804, a hold display 805, and a hold digestion display 806 as display elements. indicate. Since the details of each of these display elements are the same as those of the display screen 500 shown in FIG. 63 (1), the description thereof will be omitted. After the display of the display screen 800 is performed, the gaming machine 10 starts the next variable display.

The display screen 810 shown in FIG. 106 (2) is a display screen after the variable display is started. The display screen 810 is a screen after the display screen 800 (a screen to be displayed later in time), and shows a screen during variable display (during three symbols changing). The details of the display screen 810 are the same as those of the display screen 510 shown in FIG. 63 (2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3) is a display screen when the reach effect occurs after the start of the variable display, similar to the display screen 511 shown in FIG. 63 (3) described above. The display screen 811 is a screen after the display screen 810, and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols display "3". In this display screen 811, unlike the above-mentioned display screen 511, due to the occurrence of a new start prize of special figure 1 during variable display, the special figure 1 hold number display 803 has a hold memory number of "4" in the special figure 1 game. ”, And the hold display 805 indicates that the number of hold storages is“ 4 ”.

Further, in the middle of the change from the display screen 810 to the display screen 811, for example, the above-mentioned overflow switch signal is output, and in response to this, the display screen 811 prompts the player or the like to remove the ball from the lower plate 23. 807 is displayed. When an error including opening of the glass frame (including an abnormality or fraud detected by the sensor or switch described above) occurs, the game control device 100 is provided in various parts of the program of the game control device 100 described above. By the effect command setting process, the error information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as a command (specifically, as an error / illegal system command of a one-shot system command) in the same manner as other information and commands. Then, in the above-mentioned steps D22, 23, 27 and the like, the effect control device 300 receives and analyzes a command from the game control device 100, and operates according to the command (if it is related to an error, the corresponding error display). And error notification including the output of error notification sound) is performed. In addition, there may be an error in which the effect control device 300 independently determines the occurrence of an error and notifies the error. As one of the error notifications realized by the effect control device 300 in this way, the error notification image 807 is also displayed.

The error notification image 807 is, for example, an image including the characters "please pull out the ball", for example, at a position where the display position partially overlaps with the large symbol group 801 and has priority over other images such as the large symbol group 801. Is displayed (with a high display priority). That is, the error notification image 807 is displayed on the front side of the large symbol group 801 so as to partially hide the large symbol group 801, and the entire error notification image 807 is viewed by the observer (player, player) on this display screen 811. (Amusement store clerk, etc.) can be visually recognized.

Note that concealment is to cover up, but it is not limited to a mode in which the image on the back side (an image having a relatively low display priority) is completely invisible, and a mode in which the image on the back side is difficult to see. May be included. For example, the error notification image 807 may be displayed semi-transparently, and the image on the back side where the display position overlaps with the error notification image 807 (in this case, a part of the large symbol group 801) may be thinly seen through. Further, the error notification image 807 may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with other images such as the large symbol group 801. In this case, the context (relationship of display priority) with other images that do not overlap is naturally limited. Not done. In any case, the error notification image 807 is basically displayed so that the visibility of the entire image is ensured, except when the specific effect described later is performed.

Further, as an error notification for displaying the error notification image, the case of the lower plate overflow is given as an example, but various other errors (including abnormalities and illegalities) are also displayed in the same manner. For example, in order to encourage the player to hit the left side when a state in which the game ball is hit to the left side of the game area and the opposite right is hit (a kind of abnormality) is detected. The display of the notification image to be performed is also included.

The display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106 (4) is a display screen of the cut-in effect during the reach effect. The display screen 812 is a screen after the display screen 811 and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols display "3". The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation with the cut-in display 813 (cut-in effect) for the variable display during the reach effect. On this display screen 812, the large symbol group 801 is displayed relatively small at the position of the upper left corner so that the large symbol group 801 does not overlap with the cut-in display 813 as much as possible.

The cut-in display 813 of this specific example is an image group composed of a rocket-like character 814, a rocket-riding character 815 (a tiger-like character), and a background, and produces a predetermined degree of expectation. The effect of displaying this cut-in display 813 is an effect of a strong notice (a notice with a relatively high expectation of a big hit) that is prioritized over an error display (at least an error display that notifies a weak error of low importance). This is an example of a specific production). In the case of the specific example of the cut-in display 813, a large rocket-like character 814 appears in a dark background image displayed so as to cover a wide range of the screen (display area of the display device 41), and the character 814 appears. The display of the character 815 (a tiger-like character) on the rocket suggests to the player that the expectation of a big hit is particularly high. In this case, the appearance of a large rocket-like character 814 is highly expected, and if the rocket has a character 815 (a tiger-like character) on it, the expectation is even higher. good.

In the present embodiment, the image displayed in the above-mentioned strong notice effect (specific effect) has priority (display priority is higher) than the error display (at least the error display for notifying a weak error of low importance). Display (in a high state). That is, the cut-in display 813 (including the character 814, the character 815, and their background images) is displayed in front of the error notification image 807 so as to hide a part or the whole of the error notification image 807, and this display is displayed. In the example of the screen 812, the entire cut-in display 813 can be visually recognized by an observer (a player, a clerk of a game store, etc.).

Note that concealment is to cover up, but it is not limited to the mode in which the image on the back side (the image with a relatively low display priority) is completely invisible as described above, and the image on the back side is displayed. A mode that makes it difficult to see may be included. For example, the cut-in display 813 is displayed semi-transparently (however, the transparency is preferably low), and the image on the back side where the display position overlaps with the cut-in display 813 (in this case, a part of the error notification image 807, etc.). It may be in a state where it can be seen through thinly.

Then, the gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 on the display screens 811 and 812, and outputs the corresponding error notification sound (the same applies to the display screens 812a, 812b, and 812c of FIG. 107, which will be described later). For example, the voice "Please pull out the ball" (error notification sound) is output from the speakers 19a and 19b (sound output means). This error notification sound is given priority over the sound output for the effect such as BGM that is output together with the variable display effect (including the advance notice effect such as the cut-in display 813) being executed. Specifically, the volume of the error notification sound (or a parameter that affects the audibility such as the directivity of the sound) is made larger than the sound output for the production, or the sound for the production is output during the output of the error notification sound. Stop the output.

Here, the effect of the cut-in display 813 corresponds to the first effect having priority over the error notification (display for error notification (that is, error display), sound output for error notification, etc.). On the other hand, the production by the sound output for the production such as BGM corresponds to the second production which is inferior to the error notification.

As in the present embodiment, if the image to be displayed in the strong notice effect (specific effect) (the image forming the first effect) is displayed with priority over the error display, even if an error occurs. It is possible to entertain the player and realize a high level of entertainment. That is, by displaying the display on the front side with priority over the error display, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player and improve the interest when an error occurs. In the case where the error display is always prioritized even for the strong notice as in the past, the error display makes it impossible for the player to see at least a part of the display even if the strong notice is produced. However, in the present embodiment, this problem can be solved. In particular, images such as the above-mentioned characters 814 and 815 whose expectations differ greatly depending on the presence or absence of appearance (the image most watched by the player, the main display of the strong notice) become invisible due to the error display (especially the weak error). If this happens, the interest of the game will be greatly reduced, but in the present embodiment, such a problem can be avoided.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the error display is hidden by the strong notice, the error notification sound has priority over the sound output for the effect (the sound output that forms the second effect), so that the error notification sound is used. It becomes easier for the player or the like to notice that it is an error, the operation for correcting the error state can be appropriately performed, and the reliability of the error notification can be ensured.

The display priority of the images (the order of whether the images are displayed as if they are on the front side or as if they are on the rear side when the display positions overlap) is, for example, the effect display editing described above. It can be set according to the order of editing processes in the process (step D23). As one aspect, the image data that is edited first in the effect display editing process (step D23) and is pasted (written) first in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) has a lower display priority and is displayed deeper. In this case, the editing process may be performed in order from the image data having the lowest display priority.

Next, the display screens 812a, 812b, and 812c shown in FIGS. 107 (1), (2), and (3) are replaced with the display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106 (4), respectively, in FIG. 106 (3). It is another specific example of the screen to be displayed after displaying the display screen 811 to be shown.

In the display screen 812a shown in FIG. 107 (1), among the images constituting the cut-in display 813, the background image is displayed as an auxiliary display on the back side of the error display image (that is, the error notification image 807), and the rest. This is an example in which only the images of the character 814 and the character 815 are displayed on the front side with priority over the error notification image 807. In this way, the image that hides the error notification image is a part of the image displayed in the specific effect (for example, the effect of the strong notice) (preferably a characteristic image that suggests a difference in the jackpot expectation degree, for example, the strong notice. Main display) may be the only one. On the display screen 812a, for example, the character 814 may be displayed on the back side of the error notification image 807 as an auxiliary display, and only the character 815 may be displayed on the front side of the error notification image 807 as the main display. As a result, it is possible to realize a high degree of interest by a specific effect (for example, a strong notice effect) while ensuring the visibility of the error display to some extent.

Here, in the cut-in display 813, the effect by the character 815 or the like displayed on the front side of the error notification image 807 corresponds to the first effect that takes precedence over the error notification. On the other hand, of the cut-in display 813, the background image displayed on the back side of the error notification image 807 corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

On the display screen 812b shown in FIG. 107 (2), instead of the cut-in display 813, a plurality of small rocket-like characters 814a are displayed as an effect of a weak notice (a notice with a lower expectation of a big hit than a strong notice). There is. This small rocket-like character 814a is displayed behind the error notification image 807 and does not hide the error notification image 807. As described above, with respect to the effect of the weak notice, the error display may be prioritized. As a result, for the production of a weak notice, the visibility of the error display can always be maintained good even if the notice occurs. Here, the effect of the weak notice by the character 814a displayed on the back side of the error notification image 807 corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

When the display effect is inferior to the error notification (when the error display is prioritized over the display effect) as in the effect of the weak notice shown in FIG. 107 (2), the sound output for the effect is notified of the error. It may be prioritized over the sound output for (especially the notification sound of a weak error). For example, FIG. 107 (2) illustrates a mode in which a voice output of an error notification "Please pull out the ball" is performed, but when a warning effect for the appearance of the character 814a is performed, this "" Temporarily reduce or set the volume of the voice output of the error notification "Please pull out the ball" to zero, and the sound output (BGM, sound effect, for example, "Rocket group start" for the effect accompanying the notice effect that the character 814a appears. It may be a mode in which the voice such as "!" Is given priority (for example, at a louder volume than the error notification sound).

As a result, even if a part of the notice display effect is hidden by the error display, the sound output for the advance notice effect is preferentially performed, so that the effect and interest of the effect can be maintained. In this case, the effect of the sound output for the effect corresponds to the first effect that takes precedence over the error notification. On the other hand, the display effect by the character 814a corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

The display screen 812c shown in FIG. 107 (3) is a case where the error notification image 807 whose display is started on the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3) is a strong error (more important than a weak error). , Is a specific example of the display screen after the display screen 811. As a strong error, for example, there is an illegal error detected by the above-mentioned panel radio wave sensor 62 or magnetic sensor 61. On the display screen 812c, the error notification image 807, which is an error display of a strong error, is prioritized over the cut-in display 813, which is an effect display of the strong warning, and the error notification image 807 is placed in front of the cut-in display 813. it's shown. In this way, the error notification image concealed by the specific effect may be limited to only weak errors. As a result, for the error display of an important strong error, the visibility can be surely ensured and the reliability of the error notification can be ensured highly.

When the error notification (error display, sound output for error notification, etc.) is continuously performed for a predetermined execution time, the execution time of the effect of hiding the error display such as the above-mentioned cut-in display 813 and the error notification. It is preferable that the execution time of the sound output for effect, which has priority over the sound output of, is less than the shortest execution time of error notification. As a result, even if the effect of hiding the error display or the sound output for the effect prioritizing the error notification is performed, the error notification is hindered by these effects for at least a part of the period during which the error notification is performed. It will be done without fail.

Further, when the error display is performed by blinking display (which is periodically turned on and off, or displayed and hidden repeatedly), the execution time of the effect of hiding the error display such as the cut-in display 813 described above is set. As shown in FIG. 113 (2) described later, it is preferable that the error display time is less than the lighting display time. As a result, even if the effect of hiding the error display is performed, the error display is ensured without being hindered by this effect for at least a part of the period during which the error display is performed.

Further, when the error display is performed by blinking display, for example, FIG. 113 (3) described later, for example, so that the execution timing of the effect of hiding the error display such as the cut-in display 813 described above does not synchronize with the lighting timing of the error display. As shown in the above, a mode may be used in which the execution timing of the error display or the execution timing of the effect is adjusted by inserting a temporal offset (shift time) as necessary.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 has a main control means (game control means; game control device 100) that controls the game such as controlling the progress of the game, and identification information for directing (decorative special figure, for example, the above-mentioned large symbol). Display means (display device 41) for performing a variable display game for variable display of group 801), and effect means (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) including display means based on a command of the main control means. A subordinate control means (effect control means; effect control device 300) for performing effect control to be controlled is provided. The slave control means can execute an error display for notifying an error occurring in the gaming machine 10 based on a command or an error determination by the slave control means, and the error display can be performed as an effect by the effect means. A control unit (CPU311) capable of executing a specific effect of concealing at least a part thereof (for example, an effect of displaying a cut-in display 813) is provided. As an error display, the control unit displays, for example, an error notification image (for example, an error notification image 807), which is an image for notifying an error, in a display means, for example, and the specific effect hides at least a part of the error notification image. It should be noted that the error display and the specific effect may be performed by a display means different from the display means for performing the variable display game.

(2) Sound output means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b) are further provided, and the control unit of (1) can output an error notification sound for notifying an error occurring in the game machine by the sound output means. When the sound output for the effect is included in the specific effect, the error notification sound is output with priority over the sound output for the effect.

(3) The control unit of (1) is a background of a first image (for example, character 814 and character 815 in the cut-in display 813) and a second image (for example, the cut-in display 813) as an effect image in a specific effect. (Image) can be displayed, and the display priority of the first image is set higher than that of the error notification image, and the display priority of the second image is set lower than that of the error notification image. That is, the first image hides the error notification image at the portion overlapping with the error notification image, and the second image does not hide the error notification image even at the portion overlapping with the error notification image (displays so that the error notification image is on the front side). ).

(4) The control unit of (1) has a first effect corresponding to a specific effect (for example, a strong notice effect) and a second effect not corresponding to the specific effect (for example, a weak notice effect) as an effect by the effect means. Is possible, and for the effect image to be displayed in the first effect (for example, the cut-in display 813 or the character 814 in the cut-in display 813), the display priority is set higher than the error notification image, and the second effect is set. For the effect image (for example, character 814a) to be displayed in the effect of, the display priority is set lower than that of the error notification image. That is, the effect image displayed in the first effect hides the error notification image at the portion overlapping with the error notification image, and the effect image displayed in the second effect hides the error notification image even at the portion overlapping with the error notification image. Set not to (display the error notification image on the front side).

(5) The control unit of (1) can notify a first error (for example, a strong error) and a second error (for example, a weak error) as errors, and display priority of an image for notifying the first error. Is set higher than the display priority of the image to be displayed as the specific effect, and the display priority of the image for notifying the second error is set lower than the display priority of the image to be displayed as the specific effect. That is, the image for notifying the first error is not concealed by the effect image at the portion overlapping with the effect image displayed in the specific effect, and the image for notifying the second error is the effect image displayed in the specific effect. Set so that the part that overlaps with is hidden by the production image.

(6) The control unit of (1) can notify a first error (for example, a strong error) and a second error (for example, a weak error) as errors, and a sound output for notifying the first error and a second error. The sound output for notifying the error of is prioritized over the sound output performed as an effect including a specific effect.

(7) The control unit of (1) displays an effect image for displaying the display priority of the error notification image related to a predetermined error notification (for example, strong error notification) as a specific effect (for example, a strong notice or weak notice effect). If it is set higher than the above and at least a part of the effect image is concealed by the error notification image, the effect sound output as a specific effect related to the concealed effect image is set to be an error notification as a predetermined error notification. Give priority to sound output. The feature described in (7) is, for example, a modification in which the effect sound output is prioritized over the error notification sound in the specific example (example in which the error display is prioritized) shown in FIGS. 107 (2) and 107 (3). Corresponds to the feature of the example.

(8) The effect means of (1) further include sound output means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b) and movable effect means (for example, board effect device 44), and the control unit is generated by the gaming machine. It is possible to output the error notification sound that notifies the error by the sound output means, and when the specific effect includes the sound output for the effect, the error notification sound is output with priority over the sound output for the effect. , The display means displays the effect display (effect display) related to the movable operation regardless of whether or not the movable effect means performs a normal movable operation.

If the movable effect means cannot perform normal movable operation, that is, if the movable effect means is defective, the actuator (motor or solenoid) of the movable effect means may be out of order, the required connector may be disconnected or poorly connected, or the wiring may be defective. There is a disconnection, a malfunction of the mechanical mechanism, etc.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen and a movable accessory according to the fifth embodiment.

Since the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 108 (1) is the same as the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3) described above, the description thereof will be omitted. After this display screen 811, the gaming machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) in which the movable accessory operates.

The display screen 821 shown in FIG. 108 (2) is a screen after the display screen 811 and is a display screen displaying the effect images 816 and 817 as the background of the strong notice that the movable accessory operates. .. As the movable accessory, for example, the movable portion of the above-mentioned third board effect device 706 (described with reference to FIG. 82 in the third embodiment) moves to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the display device 41, and the display area is covered. It is positioned at a predetermined position that covers the vicinity of the upper side from the central part. The effect image 816 is a background image that extends from the back side (back side) of the circular movable portion of the third board effect device 706 to the surroundings, and is a third board effect device 706 when viewed from the front (that is, viewed from the player). It is an image that decorates the circumference of the circular movable part and creates an effect together with the movable part.

Further, the effect image 817 is a pair of left and right images that represent a predetermined facial expression of the human eye, and is superimposed on the front side in the effect image 816. In the case of this example, the circular movable portion of the third board effect device 706 is provided with openings 706a like the eyes of a human face at two locations on the left and right, and the effect image 817 is provided from the openings 706a. Each of them is visible from the front, and the circular movable portion of the third board effect device 706 and the effect image 817 realize a display like a human face with a predetermined facial expression.

The effect images 816 and 817 are set to have a lower display priority than the error notification image 807, and are displayed behind the error notification image 807. Further, the effect images 816 and 817 may be displayed as an integrated image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (2), the circular movable portion of the third board effect device 706 moved to a predetermined position hides almost the entire error notification image 807 in this case, and an error display is performed. Also entertains the player and realizes a highly entertaining production. The display of the effect images 816 and 817 may be started in the state shown in FIG. 108 (2) from the time when the movement from the position where the third board effect device 706 is housed is started, or the third board effect device may be displayed. The same may be started when the 706 moves to a predetermined position, or the third board effect is started from the display of only the lower end portion of the effect image 816 in response to the appearance of the movable part of the third board effect device 706. It may be displayed so as to move integrally with the movable portion of the third board effect device 706 so as to follow the movement of the movable portion of the device 706.

The display screen 821 shown in FIG. 108 (3) is the same as the display screen 821 shown in FIG. 108 (2) as an image displayed in the display area of the display device 41. FIG. 108 (3) shows a state in which a strong notice accompanied by the operation of the third board effect device 706 is started, but the movable part of the third board effect device 706 does not move from the storage position due to, for example, a failure of the third board effect device 706. Is shown. In this way, when the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect images 816 and 817 are displayed as a strong warning effect, and the error is displayed on the front side with priority over the effect images 816 and 817. The entire broadcast image 807 becomes visible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player or the like recognize the abnormal state of the movable character that the movable character does not move even though it is a strong notice that the movable character should move. Even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (where no error has occurred), the effect images 816 and 817 are displayed in this way so that the player or the like can recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory. Is preferable.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment as well, the gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and produces the corresponding sound output for error notification in the same manner as in the case of FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment) described above. Give priority to sound output. In FIG. 108, in addition to the sound output for directing, the sound output for error notification is not shown.

Here, the effect by the third board effect device 706 (movable accessory) corresponds to the first effect that takes precedence over the error notification. On the other hand, the production by the sound output for the production such as the effect images 816 and 817 and the BGM corresponds to the second production which is inferior to the error notification.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the error notification image is concealed by the effect by the movable accessory has been described, but when the effect by the movable accessory is a weak notice effect, when the effect by the movable accessory occurs. In addition, when the error notification (including the display of the error notification image) is performed, for example, the movable accessory may be changed to an effect that does not execute the operation of hiding the error notification image 807.

[Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen and a movable accessory according to the first modification of the fifth embodiment.

Since the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 109 (1) is the same as the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3) described above, the description thereof will be omitted. After this display screen 811, the gaming machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) in which the movable accessory operates. Note that FIG. 109 (1) shows a state in which the lower ends of the movable portions of the above-mentioned second board effect devices 705L and 705R, which are movable accessories, are located on the upper left and upper right front surfaces of the display area of the display device 41. It is shown as an example. However, at this point in time, the lower ends of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R may not be located in front of the display area of the display device 41 and may be retracted upward from the display area.

The display screen 823 shown in FIG. 109 (2) is a screen after the display screen 811 and is a display screen for displaying the effect image 816 as a background of a strong notice in which the movable accessory operates. As the movable accessory, for example, the movable portion of the above-mentioned second board effect device 705L, 705R (described with reference to FIG. 82 in the third embodiment) moves toward the center of the display area of the display device 41. The lower end of the movable portion is in a state of partially concealing the error notification image 807 displayed in the central portion of the display area.

The display screen 824 shown in FIG. 109 (3) is the same as the display screen 823 shown in FIG. 109 (2) as an image displayed in the display area of the display device 41. However, the size and display position of the effect image 816 may be different between the display screen 824 and the display screen 823. Further, FIG. 109 (3) shows a state in which the movements of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R, which are movable accessories, have reached a predetermined position. That is, the lower ends of the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R reach a position slightly lower than the center of the display area of the display device 41, and the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R are adjacent to each other on the left and right. It is positioned so that it is joined so that it fits. In this state, a wide area including substantially the upper half of the display area of the display device 41 is concealed by the movable parts of the joined second board effect devices 705L and 705R, and most of the error notification image 807 is the second board effect device 705L. , 705R concealed by moving parts.

In this modification, the effect image 816 is a background image that extends from the back side (back side) of the movable portion of the second board effect device 705L, 705R to the surroundings, and is the first seen from the front (that is, from the player's point of view). This is an image in which the periphery of the movable part of the two-board effect device 705L and 705R is decorated and the effect is performed integrally with the movable part. Although the same reference numerals are used because they are the same type of effect images, the effect image 816 shown in FIG. 108 and the effect image 816 shown in FIG. 109 are different in color, pattern, brightness, and the like. The aspect of the image may be different. The effect image 816 is set to have a lower display priority than the error notification image 807, and is displayed behind the error notification image 807.

Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (3), the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R that have moved to the predetermined positions conceal almost the entire error notification image 807 in this case, and the error display is performed. Also entertains the player and realizes a highly entertaining production. The display of the effect image 816 may be started in the state shown in FIG. 109 (2) from the time when the movement is started from the position where the second board effect device 705L and 705R are housed, or the second board effect device may be displayed. It may be started in the same manner when the 705L and 705R have moved to a predetermined position, or it is started from the display of only the lower end portion of the effect image 816 in response to the appearance of the movable portion of the second board effect device 705L and 705R. It may be displayed so as to move integrally with the movable part of the second board effect device 705L, 705R so as to follow the movement of the movable part of the second board effect device 705L, 705R.

Further, in the case of this modification as well, the gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and produces the corresponding sound output for error notification, as in the case of FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment) described above. Give priority to sound output. In FIG. 109, in addition to the sound output for directing, the sound output for error notification is not shown.

Here, the effect by the second board effect device 705L, 705R (movable accessory) corresponds to the first effect prioritizing the error notification. On the other hand, the effect by sound output for effect such as effect image 816 and BGM corresponds to the second effect which is inferior to the error notification.

[Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the second modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 110. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the second modification of the fifth embodiment.

Since the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 110 (1) is the same as the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3) described above, the description thereof will be omitted. After this display screen 811, the gaming machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) in which the movable accessory operates.

The display screen 823a shown in FIG. 110 (2) is a screen after the display screen 811 and displays the effect image 816 as the background of the strong notice in which the movable accessory operates and the auxiliary display (fault recognition) of the strong notice. It is a display screen displaying the auxiliary images 826L and 826R which are possible displays). Here, the effect image 816 is the same image as the effect image 816 of the modification 1 shown in FIG. 109 (2). The auxiliary images 826L and 826R are located behind the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R when the second board effect devices 705L and 705R operate normally, and are located behind the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R. It is an image displayed at a position and a size that cannot be visually recognized by the moving part of. In the case of the example of the figure, the auxiliary images 826L and 826R have an outer shape similar to that of the movable part of the second board effect device 705L and 705R, and are smaller than the movable part.

The display screen 824a shown in FIG. 110 (3) is a screen after the display screen 823a, and displays the effect image 816 and the auxiliary image 827 which is the auxiliary display (fault recognizable display) of the strong notice. It is a display screen. Here, the effect image 816 is the same image as the effect image 816 of the modification 1 shown in FIG. 109 (3). The auxiliary image 827 is located behind the movable portion of the second board effect device 705L, 705R when the second board effect device 705L, 705R operates normally, and the second board effect device 705L, 705R is movable. It is an image displayed at a position and a size that is always concealed by a part and becomes invisible. In the case of the example of the figure, the auxiliary image 827 is an image smaller in size than the moving parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R, including the characters "character failure".

Then, FIGS. 110 (2) and 110 (3) started a strong notice accompanied by the operation of the second board effect device 705L, 705R, but for example, the second board effect due to the failure of the second board effect device 705L, 705R Indicates a state in which the movable parts of the devices 705L and 705R do not move from the storage position. That is, FIG. 110 (2) shows the timing of the advance notice effect in which the second panel effect devices 705L and 705R should be operating as shown in FIG. 109 (2) in the above-mentioned modification 1, but the second panel shows. Indicates a state in which the effect devices 705L and 705R are not operating. Further, FIG. 110 (3) shows the timing of the advance notice effect that the second board effect devices 705L and 705R should be operating as shown in FIG. 109 (3) in the above-mentioned modification 1, but the second board effect Indicates a state in which the devices 705L and 705R are not operating.

In this way, when the movable accessory does not move to the front side of the screen, only the effect image 816 is displayed as a strong warning effect, and the error notification image 807 is displayed on the front side preferentially over the effect image 816. The entire image becomes visible, and the auxiliary images 826L and 826R and the auxiliary image 827 become visible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player or the like surely recognize the abnormal state of the movable character that the movable character does not move even though it is a strong notice that the movable character should move. Even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (where no error has occurred), the effect image 816 is displayed in this way, or the auxiliary images 826L, 826R and the auxiliary image 827 are displayed, and the movable accessory is displayed. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the player or the like recognizes the abnormal state.

Further, in the case of this modification as well, the gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and produces the corresponding sound output for error notification, as in the case of FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment) described above. Give priority to sound output. In FIG. 110, in addition to the sound output for directing, the sound output for error notification is not shown.

[Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the third modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen and a movable accessory according to the third modification of the fifth embodiment.

Since the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 111 (1) is the same as the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3) described above, the description thereof will be omitted. After this display screen 811, the gaming machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) in which the movable accessory operates.

The display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111 (2) is a screen after the display screen 811 and is a display screen displaying the effect images 816 and 828 as the background of the strong notice that the movable accessory operates. .. As the movable accessory, for example, the movable portion of the above-mentioned third board effect device 706 (described with reference to FIG. 82 in the third embodiment) moves to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the display device 41, and the display area is covered. It is positioned at a predetermined position that covers the vicinity of the upper side from the central part. The effect image 816 is a background image extending from the back side (back side) of the circular movable portion of the third board effect device 706 to the surroundings, as in the example of FIG. 108 (2) described above, and is a movable portion when viewed from the front. It is an image that decorates the surroundings of the building and creates it together with the moving parts.

Further, the effect image 828 is a pair of left and right images that represent a predetermined facial expression of the human eye, and is superimposed and displayed on the front side in the effect image 816. In this example as well, as in the example of FIG. 108 (2) described above, the circular movable portion of the third board effect device 706 is provided with openings 706a at two locations on the left and right, such as the eyes of a human face. The effect image 828 can be seen from the front through this opening 706a, and the circular movable part of the third board effect device 706 and the effect image 828 realize a display like a human face with a predetermined expression. Will be done.

The effect images 816 and 828 are set to have a lower display priority than the error notification image 807, and are displayed behind the error notification image 807. Further, the effect images 816 and 828 may be displayed as an integrated image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (2), the circular movable portion of the third board effect device 706 moved to a predetermined position hides almost the entire error notification image 807, and even if the error display is performed, the game is played. Achieve a highly entertaining production that will entertain people. The display of the effect images 816 and 828 may be started in the state shown in FIG. 111 (2) from the time when the movement from the position where the third board effect device 706 is housed is started, or the third board effect device may be displayed. The same may be started when the 706 moves to a predetermined position, or the third board effect is started from the display of only the lower end portion of the effect image 816 in response to the appearance of the movable part of the third board effect device 706. It may be displayed so as to move integrally with the movable portion of the third board effect device 706 so as to follow the movement of the movable portion of the device 706.

The display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111 (3) is a screen after the display screen 811, and the image displayed in the display area of the display device 41 is the same as the display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111 (2). Is. FIG. 111 (3) shows a state in which the movable part of the third board effect device 706 does not move from the storage position due to, for example, a failure of the third board effect device 706, although the strong notice accompanied by the operation of the third board effect device 706 is started. Is shown. In this way, when the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect images 816 and 828 are displayed as a strong warning effect, and the error is displayed on the front side with priority over the effect images 816 and 828. The entire broadcast image 807 becomes visible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player or the like recognize the abnormal state of the movable character that the movable character does not move even though it is a strong notice that the movable character should move. Even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (where no error has occurred), the effect images 816 and 828 are displayed in this way so that the player or the like can recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory. Is preferable.

The display screen 821b shown in FIG. 111 (4) is a screen after the display screen 811 like the display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111 (3). Characteristically, on the display screen 821b shown in FIG. 111 (4), in addition to the display of the effect images 816 and 828, the auxiliary image 829 which is the auxiliary display (fault recognizable display) of the strong notice is displayed. When the third board effect device 706 operates normally, the auxiliary image 829 is located behind the movable part of the third board effect device 706 and is always concealed by the movable part of the third board effect device 706. It is an image displayed in a position and size that makes it invisible. In the case of the example of the figure, the auxiliary image 829 includes the characters "character failure" and is an image smaller in size than the movable part of the third board effect device 706.

Then, FIG. 111 (4) started a strong notice accompanied by the operation of the third board effect device 706, as in FIG. 111 (3), but for example, due to a failure of the third board effect device 706, the third board effect device The state in which the movable part of 706 does not move from the storage position is shown. That is, FIG. 111 (4) shows the timing of the advance notice effect that the third board effect device 706 should be operating as shown in FIG. 111 (2), but the third board effect device 706 is not operating. Indicates the state.

In the case of the example shown in FIG. 111 (4), when the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect images 816 and 828 are displayed as a strong warning effect, and the effect images 816 and 828 are prioritized. The entire error notification image 807 displayed on the front side becomes visible, and the auxiliary image 829 becomes visible. Therefore, it is possible to make the player or the like surely recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory that the movable accessory does not move even though it is a strong notice that the movable accessory should move. Even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (where no error has occurred), the effect image 816 is displayed in this way, or the auxiliary image 829 is further displayed, and the abnormal state of the movable accessory is displayed by the player or the like. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the image is recognized by the user.

Further, in the case of this modification as well, the gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and produces the corresponding sound output for error notification, as in the case of FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment) described above. Give priority to sound output. In FIG. 111, in addition to the sound output for directing, the sound output for error notification is not shown.

Here, the effect by the third board effect device 706 (movable accessory) corresponds to the first effect that takes precedence over the error notification. On the other hand, the production by sound output for production such as effect images 816 and 828 and BGM corresponds to the second production which is inferior to the error notification.

[Variation Example 4 of the Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the fourth modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen and the light guide plate of the modified example 4 of the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 112, a perspective view showing the arrangement and state of the light guide plate is shown on the left side, and an example of a display screen displayed in the display area of the display device 41 is shown on the right side. The perspective view on the left side of FIG. 112 shows only the arrangement and state of the light guide plate, and the image content of the display screen of the display device 41 is omitted in this perspective view.

The light guide plate has a plate-like body made of acrylic or the like as a main element, and light from a light emitting element such as an LED is incident on the plate-like body from one side surface, and the light is surfaced by the unevenness formed on the plate-like body. By guiding it to the side (front side), it is a device that can emit light almost uniformly on the front side and display specific characters and figures according to unevenness on the front side. As this light guide plate, when the light emitting element is not emitting light, the entire back side can be seen through from the front with high transparency, and when the light emitting element is emitting light, characters and figures corresponding to the unevenness are partially displayed. There is something that is displayed so that it emerges.

In this modification, the light guide plates 831, 832, which are such light guide plates, are arranged so as to be overlapped on the front side of the display area of the display device 41 as shown on the left side of FIG. 112 (1). In this modification, for example, two sets of light guide plates 831, 832 having a display unit (a portion that becomes a transparent window in the off state) having a size larger than the size of the display area of the display device 41 are displayed on the display device 41. It is placed in a fixed state by overlapping it on the front of the area. It should be noted that the illustration of the light emitting element and the like attached to the light guide plates 831 and 832 is omitted. Further, the light guide plates 831, 832 are provided so as to be movable from a standby position (storage position) retracted away from the front surface of the display area of the display device 41 to a position overlapping the front surface of the display area of the display device 41, for example. It may be used as a movable accessory by moving from the standby position when performing the effect by the light guide plates 831, 832.

As shown on the right side of FIG. 112 (1), the display screen 833 shown in FIG. 112 (1) is similar to the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106 (3) above when the reach effect occurs after the start of the variable display. It is a display screen. The display screen 833 is, for example, a screen after the display screen 810 shown in FIG. 106 (2) described above, and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols display “3”. Further, for example, the above-mentioned overflow switch signal is output during the change to the display screen 833, and the above-mentioned error notification image 807 is displayed on the display screen 833 accordingly.

Then, in the state of FIG. 112 (1), as shown on the left side of FIG. 112 (1), both the light guide plates 831, 832 are in the off state, and the display on the back side of these light guide plates 831, 832. The entire screen 833 is clearly visible from the front side. In FIG. 112, the small symbol group 802, the special figure 1 hold number display 803, the special figure 2 hold number display 804, the hold display 805, and the hold digestion display 806 described in FIG. 106 (1) and the like described above are shown. Illustration is omitted and description is also omitted.

As shown on the right side of FIG. 112 (2), the display screen 834 shown in FIG. 112 (2) is a display screen of the cut-in effect during the reach effect, similarly to the display screen 812 shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 106 (4). Is. The display screen 834 is a screen after the display screen 833, and shows a screen during reach change in which the left and right symbols display "3". The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation with a cut-in display 813a or the like (cut-in effect) for the variable display during the reach effect.

However, unlike the cut-in display 813 of the display screen 812 described above, the cut-in display 813a of this modification consists only of an image such as the background of a rocket (for example, a dark universe), and a character 814 such as a rocket. Does not include images.

Then, in the state of FIG. 112 (2), as shown on the left side of FIG. 112 (2), only the light guide plate 832 of the light guide plates 831, 832 is in the ON state, and the light guide plate 832 is in the ON state. As a result, the character 832a, which is an image displayed on the light guide plate 832, becomes visible from the front side, and the display screen 834 on the back side of each light guide plate 831 and 832 is clear from the front side except for the display range of the character 832a. It is visible to the user. In other words, as shown on the right side of FIG. 112 (2), the display area of the display device 41 is partially concealed by the character 832a, which is an image displayed on the light guide plate 832, and in this case, of the error notification image 807. The corresponding range of is concealed by the character 832a. For this reason, even if an error is displayed, the player is entertained and a highly entertaining production is realized.

Here, the character 832a, which is an image displayed on the light guide plate 832, is a rocket-like image like the character 814 shown in FIG. 106 (4) described above, and is a cut of the display screen 834 when viewed from the front. It overlaps with the in-display 813a (display of the display area of the display device 41) to realize an integrated display effect.

Note that this example is only an example, and the image displayed on the light guide plate 832 may include another image, for example, a character on a rocket. Further, a part of the image like a rocket, for example, the part of the flame emitted from the rocket engine radiated from the lower end of the rocket is displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41 (that is, a part of the display screen 834). May be done. The portion displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41 can easily change the mode (for example, display color) of the image according to the degree of expectation.

As shown on the right side of FIG. 112 (3), the display screen 834a shown in FIG. 112 (3) is a display screen of the cut-in effect during the reach effect, similarly to the display screen 812 shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 106 (4). Is. Similar to the display screen 834 shown in FIG. 112 (2), the display screen 834a is a screen after the display screen 833 shown in FIG. 112 (1), and the left and right symbols are in the reach variation of displaying "3". Show the screen. The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation with a cut-in display 813a or the like (cut-in effect) for the variable display during the reach effect. The case of FIG. 112 (3) is an effect suggesting that, for example, the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the case of FIG. 112 (2) described above.

The display screen 834a of this modification is, as an image of the cut-in effect, a position that looks like a rocket in addition to the cut-in display 813a which is an image like the background of a rocket (for example, an image like a dark universe). It is a screen which displays the character 835 like a tiger displayed in.

Then, in the state of FIG. 112 (3), as shown on the left side of FIG. 112 (3), both of the light guide plates 831, 832 are in the ON state, and the image displayed on the light guide plate 832 by this. The character 832a and the characters 831a and 831b, which are images displayed on the light guide plate 831, can be visually recognized from the front side, and the display screens 834a on the back side of the light guide plates 831, 832 are the characters 831a, 831b, 832a. It is clearly visible from the front side except for the display range of. In other words, as shown on the right side of FIG. 112 (3), the display area of the display device 41 is partially concealed by the characters 831a, 831b, 832a, which are images displayed on each light guide plate, and in this case, error notification is performed. Most of the range of the image 807 is hidden by the characters 831a, 831b, 832a. For this reason, even if an error is displayed, the player is entertained and a highly entertaining production is realized.

Here, the characters 831a, 831b, and 832a, which are images displayed on the light guide plates 831, 832, are rocket-like images similar to the character 814 shown in FIG. 106 (4) described above, and are viewed from the front. And the cut-in display 813a of the display screen 834a and the character 835 (display of the display area of the display device 41) overlap to realize an integrated display effect. In particular, in this example, when viewed from the front (ie, when viewed by the player), as shown on the right side of FIG. 112 (3), the tiger-like character 835 appears to be on board the rocket-like character 831a. It has a structure that looks like.

Note that this example is only an example, and the image displayed on the light guide plates 831, 832 may include another image, for example, a character on a rocket. Further, a part of the image such as a rocket, for example, a part of the flame radiated from the lower end of the rocket may be displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41 (that is, a part of the display screen 834a). .. Further, an image like a rocket may be displayed as a part of, for example, a cut-in display 813a of the display screen 834a, and a state in which more rockets are flying can be visually recognized when viewed from the front. The portion displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41 can easily change the mode (for example, display color) of the image according to the degree of expectation. For example, it is possible to suggest a difference in the degree of expectation by differentiating the presence / absence, form (for example, display color) and type of the character 835 on the character 831a such as a rocket.

Further, the light guide plate is not limited to two sets, and one set may be used, or three or more sets may be used. Further, the light guide plate may be in an on state, for example, the entire display may emit light to conceal the entire display area of the display device 41 in an extreme example. In addition, due to the action of the light guide plate, a part or the whole of the display screen may be whitened out (or blacked out), or the brightness or the illuminance of a part or the whole of the display screen may be reduced to hide the error notification image. There may be a mode of doing so. Further, the light guide plate may be in a mode of moving from the front surface of the display device 41 to stand by at a position that does not overlap with the display area of the display device 41 when the effect is not performed. In this case, the type is difficult to see through even in the off state. You can use the one (the one with low translucency).

Further, in the case of this modification as well, the gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and produces the corresponding sound output for error notification, as in the case of FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment) described above. Give priority to sound output. In FIG. 112, in addition to the sound output for directing, the sound output for error notification is not shown.

Here, the effect by the light guide plates 831,832 (display means, movable accessory) corresponds to the first effect that takes precedence over the error notification. On the other hand, the effect of the sound output for the effect such as the effect image 813a and BGM corresponds to the second effect which is inferior to the error notification.

In addition, as the effect means for performing the effect (including error notification), there are a display means for producing the effect by display, a sound output means for performing the effect by voice, and a movable accessory which performs the effect by the movement of the movable part. Specific examples of the priority order of the error notification and the advance notice effect, including the one described in (fifth embodiment) and the fourth embodiment described above, are collectively described as follows, which differ depending on the effect means.

First, if the priority in the display means is described in order from the one with the highest priority, the order is strong error notification> strong warning effect> weak error notification> weak notification effect. Next, the order of priority in the sound output means is similarly strong error notification> weak error notification> strong warning effect, weak warning effect. The priority of the sound output means may be strong error notification> weak error notification> strong warning effect> weak notification effect. Next, the priority of the movable accessory is similarly strong notice effect> strong error notification> weak error notification> weak notice effect. Here, a strong error means an error having a relatively high importance, and a weak error means an error having a lower importance than a strong error. In addition, a strong notice means a notice with a relatively high reliability (expectation such as a big hit), and a weak notice means a notice with a lower reliability than a strong notice.

[Variation 5 of the fifth embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in the fifth modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113. In this modification, the error display and the effect of hiding the error display described in the present embodiment (fifth embodiment) and the above-mentioned fourth embodiment (display effect of strong notice such as cut-in effect, movable accessory). It is characterized by the execution time and execution timing of the effect of the movement of the movable part of the above, the display of the light guide plate and the effect of the movement). FIG. 113 is an example of a timing chart showing the temporal relationship between the error display (blinking display) and the effect of hiding the error display.

First, although not shown, when error notification (error display or sound output for error notification, etc.) is continuously performed for a predetermined execution time (when not blinking display), the above-mentioned third board effect device 706 or It is preferable that the execution time of the effect of hiding the error display by the second board effect device 705L, 705R and the light guide plates 831, 832 is less than the shortest execution time of the error notification. As a result, even if the effect of hiding the error display is performed, the error notification is ensured without being hindered by this effect for at least a part of the period during which the error notification is performed.

Next, when the error display is performed by blinking display (which is periodically turned on and off, or displayed and hidden repeatedly) as shown in FIG. 113 (1), the effect of hiding the error display (the above-mentioned cut). As shown in FIG. 113 (2), the execution time of the in-display 813, the third board effect device 706, the second board effect device 705L, 705R, and the effect by the light guide plates 831 and 832) is the lighting display time of the error display (described later). It is preferable that the execution time is shorter than Ton).

Here, FIG. 113 (1) shows an effect of hiding the error display when the error display is a blinking display in which the execution time Ton is executed and the operation of being stopped (hidden) by the non-execution time Toff is repeated. This is an example of a timing chart when the execution time TP of is longer than the execution time Ton of the error display. In this case, as shown in FIG. 113 (1), if the execution timing of the error display and the execution timing of the effect of hiding the error display are synchronized, the entire time of the error display of one execution time Ton becomes the same. It is hidden, and the longest continuous time during which the observer (player, etc.) cannot visually recognize the error display becomes T0 (T0 = Ton + 2 × Toff) for a considerably long time.

However, as shown in FIG. 113 (2), when the execution time of the effect of hiding the error display is less than the lighting display time of the error display (TP <Ton), as shown in FIG. 113 (2), once. The entire time of the error display of Ton is no longer hidden, and the longest continuous time during which the observer cannot visually recognize the error display is T1 (T1 <Ton + Toff), which is much shorter than T0. That is, even if the effect of hiding the error display is performed, the error display is surely performed without being hindered by this effect for at least a part of the period during which the error display is performed, and the longest continuous time during which the error display cannot be visually recognized. It will be significantly reduced.

Further, when the error display is performed by blinking display, as shown in FIG. 113 (3), the execution timing of the effect of hiding the error display is not synchronized with the execution timing of the error display, and it is temporal as necessary. By inserting an offset ΔT (shift time), the execution timing of the error display may be adjusted.

The operation shown in FIG. 113 (3) is, for example, the execution of the error display execution period and the effect of hiding the error display in the control process in the effect control device 300 that performs the error display (blinking display) shown in FIG. 113 (1). It can be realized by determining in advance whether or not the periods overlap (at the same time) every cycle, and if it is determined that the periods overlap, the timing of starting the error display is delayed by the offset ΔT for the overlapping cycle. ..

Note that, unlike the embodiment shown in FIG. 113 (3), the execution timing of the effect may be adjusted by inserting a temporal offset ΔT with respect to the effect of hiding the error display. Further, in the control process for inserting the offset ΔT in this way, the execution time TP of the effect is the same as the execution time Ton of the error display, or as shown in FIG. 113 (1), the execution time TP of the effect is the execution time of the error display. The configuration may be performed only when it is longer than Ton (that is, when TP ≧ Ton).

In any case, by inserting the offset ΔT as described above, as shown in FIG. 113 (3), for example, the entire error display of one execution time Ton is not hidden in time, and the observation is observed. The longest continuous time during which the error display cannot be visually recognized by a person is T2, which is much shorter than T0. That is, even if the effect of hiding the error display is performed, the error display is surely performed without being hindered by this effect for at least a part of the period during which the error display is performed, and the longest continuous time during which the error display cannot be visually recognized. It will be significantly reduced.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment (including the modified examples 1 to 5) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The game machine 10 has a main control means (game control means; game control device 100) that controls the game such as controlling the progress of the game, and identification information for directing (decorative special drawing, for example, the above-mentioned large symbol). Display means (display device 41) for performing a variable display game for variable display of group 801), and effect means (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, second) including display means based on a command of the main control means. It is provided with a subordinate control means (effect control means; effect control device 300) for performing effect control for controlling the board effect device 705L, 705R, the third board effect device 706, and the like. The slave control means can execute an error display for notifying an error occurring in the gaming machine 10 based on a command or an error determination by the slave control means, and the error display can be performed as an effect by the effect means. It is possible to execute a specific effect that hides at least a part (for example, a strong notice effect that hides the error display by operating a movable accessory 706, or a strong notice effect that hides the error display by the light guide plates 831 and 832). A control unit (CPU311) is provided. As an error display, the control unit displays, for example, an error notification image (for example, an error notification image 807), which is an image for notifying an error, in a display means, for example, and the specific effect hides at least a part of the error notification image. It should be noted that the error display and the specific effect may be performed by a display means different from the display means for performing the variable display game.

(2) Sound output means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b) are further provided, and the control unit of (1) can output an error notification sound for notifying an error occurring in the game machine by the sound output means. When the sound output for the effect is included in the specific effect, the error notification sound is output with priority over the sound output for the effect.

(3) The control unit of (1) operates a movable accessory (second board effect device 705L, 705R or third board effect device 706, or a light guide plate 831, 832 when it is movable) as a specific effect. At least a part of the display area of the display means (at least a part of the error notification image) is concealed by the movable accessory, and the background image corresponding to the movable accessory (for example, the effect image 816, 817) is used as the effect image in the specific effect. ) Can be displayed, and the display priority of the background image is set lower than that of the error notification image. That is, the activated movable accessory hides the error notification image at the portion that overlaps with the error notification image, and the background image does not hide the error notification image even at the portion that overlaps with the error notification image (displays so that the error notification image is on the front side). To set.

(4) The control unit of (1) has a first effect corresponding to a specific effect (for example, a strong notice effect) and a second effect not corresponding to the specific effect (for example, a weak notice effect) as an effect by the effect means. Is possible, and the error notification image is not hidden in the second effect (for example, when the error notification is performed, the movable accessory is placed in a predetermined position even if the advance notice effect for operating the movable accessory occurs. Change to a production that does not work). Further, the error notification sound for notifying an error (weak error and strong error) is preferentially output over the sound output for the first effect and the second effect.

(5) The control unit of (1) is an auxiliary image concealed by the activated movable accessory when the movable accessory is activated as a specific effect, and is visually recognized when the movable accessory does not operate. A possible auxiliary image (for example, auxiliary image 826L, 826R, auxiliary image 827, auxiliary image 829, or a part of effect image 816) is displayed on the display means.

(6) The auxiliary image of (5) visually recognizes that the movable accessory does not perform a predetermined operation (a failure of the movable accessory or a change to an effect in which the movable accessory does not move in a predetermined position). Contains information to be made (such as characters or figures).

(7) The effect means of (1) further include sound output means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b) and movable effect means (for example, board effect device 44), and the control unit is generated by the gaming machine. It is possible to output the error notification sound that notifies the error by the sound output means, and when the specific effect includes the sound output for the effect, the error notification sound is output with priority over the sound output for the effect. , The display means displays the effect display (effect display) related to the movable operation regardless of whether or not the movable effect means performs a normal movable operation.

If the movable effect means cannot perform normal movable operation, that is, if the movable effect means is defective, the actuator (motor or solenoid) of the movable effect means may be out of order, the required connector may be disconnected or poorly connected, or the wiring may be defective. There is a disconnection, a malfunction of the mechanical mechanism, etc.

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes an effect means including a display means (display device 41) and a movable effect means (for example, a board effect device 44), and a control means (effect control means; effect control device 300) for controlling the effect means. ) And. The control means causes the display means to display an effect display (effect display) related to the movable operation regardless of whether or not the movable effect means performs a normal movable operation.

[Calculation and display of base]
Here, the calculation and display of the base as the gaming performance performed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. Here, the base is the ball ejection rate in the normal game state. Here, the normal gaming state is a state that is neither a time-saving state nor a big hit gaming state (big hit state), and more generally, the probability of a hit result in a special figure variation display game is a normal probability state (low probability). State). The payout rate is the number of payout balls per 100 out balls. Therefore, when the number of out balls in the normal game state is Nout and the number of payout balls in the normal game state is Nsafe, the base B is calculated by the formula B = (Nsafe ÷ Nout) × 100. The number of out balls is the number of balls launched into the game area and entered the out port or the winning opening (for example, the number of balls counted based on the above-mentioned out ball detection switch signal), and is the number of out balls or simply. Sometimes called out. Further, the number of payout balls is the number of prize balls paid out for winning, and may be referred to as the number of payout balls, the number of safe balls, or simply safe.

As described above in the description of FIG. 3, the game control device 100 of the game machine 10 is provided with a state display device 135. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a state display device 135 which is a display means of the base and a storage area for the base, FIG. 114 (1) shows a display unit of the state display device 135, and FIG. 114 (2) is for the base. Indicates the storage area of. Further, FIG. 115 shows an example of display by the state display device 135.

As shown in FIG. 114 (1), the status display device 135 is composed of four 4-digit 7-segment LEDs provided side by side, and a dot point (small circular light emission) is located at the lower right of each 7-segment LED. Part) is provided. Regarding the display of the base, of the 4-digit 7-segment LED, the 2 digits on the left side are the identification segment that displays the measurement time of the base (whether or not it is being measured and the order in which it was measured), and the 2 digits on the right side. Is a ratio segment that displays the base value. As shown in FIG. 115, the 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 actually displays "B" in the form of lowercase letters "b".

The game control device 100 (specifically, the CPU 111A, which is a control unit) sets a storage area for the base as shown in FIG. 114 (2) in the RWM such as the RAM 111C, and calculates the base and displays the base. use. That is, the game control device 100 sets a “out ball number” for storing the cumulative value of the out ball number and a “payout ball number” for storing the cumulative value of the payout ball number as the base calculation storage area. Further, as a base storage area for storing the calculated value of the base, "base (BL)", "base (B1)", "base (B2)", and "base (B3)" are set.

Here, the "base (BL)" is an area for storing the base being measured, the "base (B1)" is an area for storing the base measured one time before, and the "base (B2)" is 2. It is an area for storing the base measured three times before, and "base (B3)" is an area for storing the base measured three times before. That is, it is an area for storing the oldest measured value (calculated value) of the base among the storage areas in which the "base (B3)" is set.

The above-mentioned storage area for base calculation and the storage value of the base storage area are backed up and stored when the power is turned off, and when the RAM is cleared (the power is turned on by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112) except for the RWM abnormality. It is desirable to have a configuration that retains memory without clearing zero at the time.

The game control device 100 uses the status display device 135 to display the setting contents of the probability setting (setting of any of the five stages) in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described above by the status display device 135. Display the base. In the first embodiment described above, the mode in which the setting contents of the probability setting are displayed by the probability setting value display device 136 has been described. However, the probability setting value display device 136 may be deleted so that the status display device 135 also functions as the probability setting value display device. In that case, the status display device 135 displays the above setting contents in each of the above. It is performed in the mode, and in other cases, the base is displayed by the status display device 135.

The game control device 100 performs calculation and display of the base as an example as follows. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 first blinks all segments (including dot points) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

After that, the game control device 100 has a BL display state as shown in FIG. 115 (1), a B1 display state as shown in FIG. 115 (2), a B2 display state as shown in FIG. 115 (3), and FIG. 115 ( The operation of maintaining the B3 display state as shown in 4) for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is repeatedly executed. That is, in the steady state after the power is turned on, the BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B2 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B3 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and then. The BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, then the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and so on, and the four states are switched in order and repeated.

Here, in the BL display state, the game control device 100 displays "bL" (BL) indicating that the measurement time of the base is being measured (this time) in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area "base" in the ratio segment. (BL) ”value (or“ —— ”) is displayed. Further, in the B1 display state, the game control device 100 displays "b1" (B1) indicating that the measurement time of the base is one time before in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area "base (B1)" in the ratio segment. "(Or" --- ") is displayed. Further, in the B2 display state, the game control device 100 displays "b2" (B2) indicating that the measurement time of the base is two times before in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area "base (B2)" in the ratio segment. "(Or" --- ") is displayed. Further, in the B3 display state, the game control device 100 displays "b3" (B3) indicating that the measurement time of the base is three times before in the identification segment, and displays the base storage area "base (B3)" in the ratio segment. "(Or" --- ") is displayed.

On the other hand, for the purpose of calculating the base, the game control device 100 has "every time an out ball is detected (that is, every time an out ball detection switch signal is output) in the normal game state after activation, the base calculation storage area". The memory value of "the number of out balls" is increased by the value corresponding to the number of detected out balls, and every time there is a prize in the winning opening of the game ball in the normal game state (or the prize ball is paid out based on the prize). Equivalent to the number of payout balls (or the number of actually paid out balls detected based on the signal from the payout control device 200) that generated the stored value of the "number of payout balls" in the base calculation storage area (for each, etc.) Increase by the value you want. Further, the game control device 100 calculates the base B by the above-mentioned formula every time the storage value of the "out ball number" or the "payout ball number" in the base calculation storage area changes, and the calculation result is used as the base B. Overwrite the "base (BL)" of the base storage area as the latest value.

In the game control device 100, when the stored value of the "out ball number" in the base calculation storage area reaches the specified number of measured pieces (for example, 60,000 pieces), it is assumed that one measurement is completed, and the following measurement is performed. It is configured to perform processing at the end. In the process at the end of this measurement, the value of the base storage area "base (B2)" at that time is overwritten on the base storage area "base (B3)", and the base storage area "base (B1)" at that time is overwritten. Overwrites the value of the base storage area "base (B2)", overwrites the value of the base storage area "base (BL)" at that time with the base storage area "base (B1)", and further. Clear the stored values of "number of out balls" and "number of payout balls" in the base calculation storage area and reset them to zero. As a result, the base value up to 3 times before and the base value currently being measured are always stored and retained.

Then, in the game control device 100, the storage value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" is a predetermined number of calculation start numbers (for example, the storage value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" is zero) from the time when the power is turned on for the first time. In the period A, which is less than 300 (predetermined number of less than 300), in each display state, characters indicating the base measurement time such as “bL”, “b1”, etc. are blinked and displayed in the identification segment, and in FIG. 115 (4) in the ratio segment. ) Is displayed to indicate "----" (a state in which only the horizontally long segment in the center emits light) to notify that it is in an unmeasured state.

Next, when the storage value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" reaches a predetermined calculation start number (for example, a predetermined number less than 300), the game control device 100 stores the base calculation storage area and the base storage area. Initialize (clear to zero) and start the first measurement.

Then, in the period B from the start of the first measurement until the stored value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" reaches the measured number (for example, 60,000), the game control device 100 is in the BL display state. Blinks or lights up "bL", and the value of the base storage area "base (BL)" is displayed in the ratio segment. In the period B, in other display states (B1 to B3 display states), characters indicating the base measurement time such as "b1" ... are displayed blinking in the identification segment, and "----" is displayed in the ratio segment. Notify that it is in an unmeasured state.

In the BL display state, "bL" is displayed in the identification segment by blinking when the storage value of the base calculation storage area "out ball number" is less than the measured number, and the base calculation storage area "out" is displayed. When the stored value of "the number of balls" reaches the measured number, it is lit and displayed. Further, the blinking cycle of the blinking display in the identification segment and the ratio segment is, for example, 0.6 seconds, of which 0.3 seconds for lighting and 0.3 seconds for extinguishing. Further, when the stored value of the "out number of balls" reaches the number of measured pieces (for example, 60,000 pieces) and the period B ends, the above-mentioned processing at the end of the measurement is performed, and the next second measurement is started.

After that, the game control device 100 refers to the period B for performing the first measurement, the period C for performing the second measurement, the period D for performing the third measurement D, the period E for performing the fourth measurement, and so on. The measurement is performed continuously as follows. Since the calculated values of the bases of the past three times are stored after the time when the third measurement is completed, the base measurement time such as "b1" in the identification segment is set in all the B1 to B3 display states. The indicated characters are lit and displayed, and the value of the corresponding base storage area (any of "base (B1)", "base (B2)", and "base (B3)") is displayed in the ratio segment.

It should be noted that FIGS. 115 (1) to 115 (4) show an example of specific display in each display state in the above period D after the second measurement is completed. In this case, since there is no measurement result three times before, in FIG. 115 (4), which is a specific example of the B3 display state, the display of the ratio segment is "----" (display indicating the unmeasured state).

Further, in FIG. 115 (1), which is a specific example of the BL display state, the display of the ratio segment is “58”, indicating that the real-time base value currently being measured is 58. Further, in FIG. 115 (2), which is a specific example of the B1 display state, the display of the ratio segment is "67", and the base value for the specified number of measurements measured one time before is 67. It is shown that. Further, in FIG. 115 (3), which is a specific example of the B2 display state, the display of the ratio segment is "49", and the base value for the specified number of measurements measured two times before is 49. It is shown that. If the base value is 100 or more, the ratio segment is displayed as "99." (the number 99 is displayed in the ratio segment and the dot point of the last digit is lit), so that the ratio segment is 100 or more. Notify that.

The base value is generally in the normal range of, for example, about 25 to 35, and is abnormal even if it is smaller than this range or larger than this range, and this abnormality is called a base abnormality. The display example of FIG. 115 described above shows as an example a state in which the measurement results of the base abnormality exceeding the normal range are continuous, and in the normal case, the numerical value in the normal range of about 25 to 35 is shown in the identification segment. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 is, for example, a measurement value of the past three times stored in the base storage area (“base (B1)”, “base (B2)”, “base (B3)”) (the above B1). ~ B3 Display value of ratio segment in the display state) is out of the normal range and is abnormal, assuming that a base abnormality has occurred, an external signal indicating that a base abnormality has occurred is sent to an external, for example, amusement park internal management device. Send to (hall computer).

The signal (information) indicating the base abnormality is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as a command, for example, and the display area of the display device 41 is notified of the base abnormality by the control of the effect control device 300 that receives this signal. An image (for example, an image corresponding to the error notification image 807) may be displayed. In addition, since this base abnormality may occur when fraud is performed, it is desirable to set it to the above-mentioned strong error.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the measured value of the base is stored and displayed up to the past 3 times, but the number of the storage areas for the base is increased to be stored and displayed up to the past 4 times or more. It may be configured to be used. In addition, although the storage area for base calculation is set only for the one being measured, it is possible to provide a storage area for storing the number of out balls and the number of payout balls, which are the basis for calculating the past measured values. good.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment (including the modified example) will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 122. The effect control device 300 in the game machine 10 of the sixth embodiment determines a detailed effect mode within the range of the variation pattern specified by the game control device 100 (for example, within the variation time specified by the game control device 100). There is. At this time, the effect control device 300 receives the variation pattern command from the game control device 100, and determines the detailed effect mode by lottery. Therefore, even if the game control device 100 transmits the same variation pattern command, the effect control device 300 does not always execute the same effect mode.

Determining such a detailed production mode by lottery makes it difficult to perform the desired production operation from the outside, and requires a large number of man-hours in the development process. Therefore, the effect control device 300 makes it possible to receive the detailed variation pattern command in addition to the variation pattern command so that the detailed effect mode can be determined by the detailed variation pattern command without using a lottery. ing. Since the transmission of the detailed variation pattern command is a processing burden for the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 can determine the detailed effect mode by lottery when the detailed variation pattern command is not received.

First, the command system of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. First, the command system between the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the command system of the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 can determine a variation pattern instructing the outline of the effect by a random number lottery, and can notify the effect control device 300 of the variation pattern number by a variation pattern command (command).

The effect control device 300 acquires a detailed variation pattern number based on a random number lottery within the range of the outline of the effect instructed by the game control device 100. At this time, the effect control device 300 determines the detailed variation pattern command from the result of the random number lottery, and acquires the detailed variation pattern number corresponding to the detailed variation pattern command (command).

The effect control device 300 determines a detailed effect corresponding to the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and controls the effect device 850 with the determined effect content. The effect device 850 is a convenient general term for various devices related to the game effect. Specifically, the effect device 850 includes a display device 41, a board decoration device 46, a frame decoration device 18, a board effect device 44, speakers 19a, 19b, and the like.

As a result, the effect control device 300 can control the effect device 850 in the effect mode within the range specified by the game control device 100. Further, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the processing load of the gaming control device 100 while enabling the effecting device 850 to be controlled in various production modes.

Next, the command system between the game control device 100 and the test device 851 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the command system of the sixth embodiment. The test device 851 can transmit an arbitrary variation pattern command and an arbitrary detailed variation pattern command, and notify the effect control device 300.

The test device 851 can test the operation of the effect control device 300, and is, for example, a computer having a debugger function, an ICE (In-Circuit Emulator) function, or the like. The test device 851 can be connected to the effect control device 300 in place of the game control device 100 or in addition to the game control device 100 in the development environment. Further, the test device 851 is not limited to the development environment, and may be used in the installation environment of the game machine 10 in the game hall. Further, the test apparatus 851 is not limited to those used for testing, but may be used for development, verification, and other purposes.

The effect control device 300 acquires the detailed variation pattern number corresponding to the detailed variation pattern command based on the variation pattern number (variation pattern command) acquired from the test device 851 and the detailed variation pattern command.

The effect control device 300 determines a detailed effect corresponding to the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and controls the effect device 850 with the determined effect content.
As a result, the effect control device 300 can control the effect device 850 in the effect mode as instructed by the test device 851. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can cause the effect device 850 to perform a desired effect operation from the outside.

In this way, the effect control device 300 can follow the instructions from the outside (test device 851) by receiving the detailed variation pattern command up to the details where the effect content is not clarified only by the variation pattern command. can. Further, the effect control device 300 can determine the details such that the effect content is not clarified only by the variation pattern command by itself (random number lottery) without receiving the detailed variation pattern command.

The effect control device 300 can capture the variation pattern command that can be acquired only from the outside as an external command on one side, and can capture the detailed variation pattern command that can be generated internally as an internal command on one aspect. Further, the effect control device 300 can capture the variation pattern command that defines the outline of the effect as an outline command on one side, and can capture the detailed variation pattern command that defines the details of the effect as a detailed command on one side. .. Further, the effect control device 300 can capture the fluctuation pattern command used in the operating environment of the amusement park as a command for actual operation on one side, and is used in the non-operating environment of the amusement park (for example, in a test environment). The detailed fluctuation pattern command can be regarded as a non-production command (test command) on one side.

Next, a variable time command transmitted by the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a variable time command according to the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 transmits a change time command consisting of a group of commands to the effect control device 300 at the start of the change of the special figure game. For example, if the special figure game is a special figure 1 game, the game control device 100 sets a variable time command in the special figure 1 game process (see FIG. 22) and transmits it to the effect control device 300. If the special figure game is a special figure 2 game, the game control device 100 sets a variable time command in the special figure 2 game process (see FIG. 23) and transmits it to the effect control device 300.

The variable time command (variable system command) indicates a command transmitted by the game control device 100 at the start of fluctuation of the special figure game. First, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name "decorative symbol designation") in the transmission order "1". The command name "decorative symbol designation" includes MODE "85H" and one of ACTION "11H" to ACTION "7FH" depending on the decorative symbol.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “variation pattern designation”) in the transmission order “2”. The command name "variation pattern designation" includes any of MODE "C0H" to MODE "D2H" and one of ACTION "01H" to ACTION "7FH" corresponding to each variation pattern. Further, the command name "variation pattern designation" may include any of ACTION "FFF000H" to OPTION "FFF7FFH" in which detailed effects can be specified, following any of ACTION "01H" to ACTION "7FH". can.

From the viewpoint of reducing the processing load, the game control device 100 targets only MODE and ACTION in the command name "variation pattern designation", and does not target OPTION. The OPTION in the command name "variation pattern designation" is, for example, a transmission target of the test apparatus 851.

MODE is a 1-byte command in which the most significant bit is "1", and ACTION is a 1-byte command in which the most significant bit is "0". Thereby, the effect control device 300 can determine whether the command received by the most significant bit is MODE or ACTION. Further, OPTION is a 3-byte command, and the most significant bit of the first byte and the most significant bit of the second byte are set to "1". As a result, the effect control device 300 denies the combination of MODE and ACTION from the most significant bit "1" of the first byte and the most significant bit "1" of the second byte of the received command, and receives the command. Can be determined to be OPTION.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “special figure 1 hold number”) in the transmission order “3”. The command name "Special Figure 1 Hold Number" includes either MODE "A1H" and ACTION "01H" to ACTION "05H" corresponding to the hold number 4 from no hold.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command (command name “special figure 2 hold number”) in the transmission order “4”. The command name "Special Figure 2 Hold Number" includes either MODE "A2H" and ACTION "01H" to ACTION "05H" corresponding to the hold number 4 from no hold.

Here, a distribution table to be referred to when the effect control device 300 receives a command (command name “variation pattern designation”) in the transmission order “2” will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table according to the sixth embodiment (No. 1). FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table according to a sixth embodiment (No. 2).

If the received command is any of MODE "C0H" to MODE "D2H", the effect control device 300 can determine that the command corresponds to the command name "variation pattern designation". For example, when the effect control device 300 receives the MODE “C0H”, the effect control device 300 can determine that the distribution table 852 is a reference candidate. The distribution table 852 is a general term for a group of distribution tables 852a, 852b, 852c, ..., 852n which are reference candidates.

When the received command is any of ACTION "01H" to ACTION "7FH", the effect control device 300 can uniquely specify a specific distribution table to be referred to from the distribution table 852. For example, when the received command is ACTION "01H", the effect control device 300 specifies the distribution table (variation pattern command: 01H) 852a as a specific distribution table to be referred to.

The distribution table 852a defines the correspondence between the lottery random number value and the detailed fluctuation pattern command. The distribution table 852a indicates that the range in which the lottery random number value can be taken is from "0" to "999". The lottery random number value may be a pseudo-random number extracted from a high-speed counter or the like as long as it has a certain degree of randomness. Further, the distribution table 852a shows that there are six detailed fluctuation pattern commands from "FFFA01H" to "FFFA06H" that can be selected at the time of receiving the ACTION "01H" (variation pattern command: 01H).

For example, the detailed variation pattern command "FFFA01H" is a command selected with a probability of 800/1000, and the detailed variation pattern command "FFFA02H" is a command selected with a probability of 50/1000. "FFFA03H" is a command selected with a probability of 50/1000, the detailed variation pattern command "FFFA04H" is a command selected with a probability of 50/1000, and the detailed variation pattern command "FFFA05H" is 25. The command is selected with a probability of / 1000, and the detailed fluctuation pattern command "FFFA06H" is a command selected with a probability of 25/1000.

The effect control device 300 uses the detailed variation pattern command as a key, refers to the relation table, and acquires the detailed variation pattern number. Here, the relation table will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship table of the sixth embodiment.

The relationship table 853 is a table that defines the correspondence between the detailed variation pattern command and the detailed variation pattern number. The detailed variation pattern command corresponds to a detailed variation mode (effect mode). For example, the detailed variation pattern command “FFFA01H” corresponds to the detailed variation pattern number “001001”, and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 with normal variation as a detailed variation mode according to the detailed variation pattern number “001001”. do. The detailed variation pattern command "FFFA02H" corresponds to the detailed variation pattern number "001002", and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 by the left slip variation as a detailed variation mode according to the detailed variation pattern number "001002". .. The detailed variation pattern command "FFFA03H" corresponds to the detailed variation pattern number "001003", and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 by right slip variation as a detailed variation mode according to the detailed variation pattern number "001003". .. The detailed variation pattern command "FFFA04H" corresponds to the detailed variation pattern number "001004", and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 with a mid-range variation as a detailed variation mode according to the detailed variation pattern number "001004". .. The detailed variation pattern command "FFFA05H" corresponds to the detailed variation pattern number "001005", and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 with a special variation as a detailed variation mode according to the detailed variation pattern number "001005". The detailed variation pattern command "FFFA06H" corresponds to the detailed variation pattern number "001006", and the effect control device 300 controls the effect device 850 with a shortened reach variation as a detailed variation mode according to the detailed variation pattern number "001006". ..

The relation table 853 is not limited to the distribution table 852a, but the detailed variation pattern commands specified in other distribution tables such as the distribution tables 852b and 852c, and all the details set in the effect device 850. It may specify the correspondence with the fluctuation pattern number.

The distribution table 852 and the relation table 853 are stored in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300.
Next, the effect distribution process executed by the effect control device 300 when receiving a command (command name “variation pattern designation”) of the transmission order “2” among the variable command (variable command) will be described with reference to FIG. 122. do. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect distribution process of the sixth embodiment. The effect distribution process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in step D56 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51). The control unit executes the effect distribution process when the received MODE is within the range of "C0H" to "D2H".

[Step D311] The control unit acquires a command MODE and a command ACTION.
[Step D312] The control unit determines whether or not the command ACTION is received. Normally, the effect control device 300 does not include the command ACTION in the received command when the command is received from the game control device 100, but is included in the received command when the command is received from the test device 851. It may include the command ACTION. The control unit proceeds to step D313 when the command ACTION is not received, and proceeds to step D315 when the command OPTION is received.

[Step D313] The control unit selects the distribution table 852 based on the command MODE and the command ACTION.
[Step D314] The control unit determines and acquires a detailed variation pattern command by random number lottery using the selected distribution table 852. As a result, the effect control device 300 randomly acquires the detailed variation pattern command when the command optION is not received from the game control device 100.

[Step D315] The control unit acquires the command ACTION. As a result, the effect control device 300 acquires the detailed variation pattern command specified by the test device 851 when the command optION is received from the test device 851.

[Step D316] The control unit obtains the detailed variation pattern number by referring to the relation table 853 and using the detailed variation pattern command as a key. As a result, the effect control device 300 can acquire the detailed fluctuation pattern number regardless of whether or not the command OPTION is received.

[Step D317] The control unit executes the effect pattern setting process for setting a specific effect pattern based on the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and ends the effect distribution process.
Such a gaming machine 10 makes it possible to specify the details of the effect control performed by the effect control device 300 from the outside, and can reduce the development burden of the program of the effect control device 300. Further, even if the details of the effect control performed by the effect control device 300 can be specified from the outside, the game machine 10 does not increase the control load of the game control device 100.

For example, when it is desired to cause the effect control device 300 to execute the effect control corresponding to the detailed variation pattern number "001006", the game control device 100 specifies the command MODE and the command ACTION and causes the effect control device 300 to execute the effect control on the distribution table 852a. One of the defined detailed variations can be randomly selected. However, the effect control device 300 does not guarantee how many trials the detailed variation pattern number "001006" can be selected. The number of trials increases as the content of the production becomes more complicated and the options specified in the distribution table 852a increase. On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 receives a command from the test device 851, the command MODE, the command ACTION, and the command ACTION are specified from among the detailed variation modes specified in the desired distribution table 852a. One can be specified and selected. Such an effect control device 300 improves workability in program development and debugging work of effect control.

[Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. The effect control device 300 of the sixth embodiment was able to specify a detailed variation mode from the variation pattern designation command including one 3-byte OPTION, but the effect control of the modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. The device 300 differs in that a detailed variation mode can be specified from a variation pattern specification command including two or more 3-byte OPTIONs. First, the process of determining the detailed variation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of the effect distribution of the first modification of the sixth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 is not limited to the case where the variation pattern command is received once and the distribution by the distribution table 852 is performed only once, but also when a more complicated effect is performed, the distribution by the distribution table 852 is performed twice. I may do the above. For example, the effect control device 300 prepares a distribution table set when performing distribution two or more times. The distribution table set includes a distribution table for each distribution point at which distribution is performed. When the effect control device 300 receives a variation pattern command including MODE “C1H” and ACTION “01H”, the effect control device 300 includes five distribution tables (a form of distribution table 852) from distribution tables FT1 to FT5. Refer to the minute table set to determine the detailed production of the first half fluctuation.

The effect control device 300 receives a variation pattern command including OPTION according to the number of distribution points. For example, when the effect control device 300 receives a variation pattern command including OPTION "FFFA11H", OPTION "FFFA22H", and OPTION "FFFA41H", the effect control device 300 refers to the distribution table FT1 at the first distribution point and OPTION. Select the detailed variation pattern 11 (detailed variation pattern number is abbreviated) according to "FFFA11H". Next, the effect control device 300 refers to the distribution table FT2 at the distribution point corresponding to the detailed variation pattern 11 and selects the detailed variation pattern 22 (detailed variation pattern number is abbreviated) according to the OPTION “FFFA22H”. .. Further, the effect control device 300 selects the detailed variation pattern 41 (detailed variation pattern number is abbreviated) according to the OPTION "FFFA41H" with reference to the distribution table FT4 at the distribution point corresponding to the detailed variation pattern 22. Then, the effect control device 300 proceeds to select the latter half effect (second half A) corresponding to the detailed variation pattern 41. The effect control device 300 can select the detailed effect of the latter half variation (second half A) in the same manner as the first half variation. Even in this case, the effect control device 300 can receive the fluctuation pattern command including the OPTION according to the number of distribution points in the latter half fluctuation.

In this way, even when performing a more complicated effect, the effect control device 300 is detailed in response to the complicated effect by receiving a variation pattern command including OPTION according to the number of distribution points. It is possible to specify various effects.

If the variation pattern command can include two or more OPTIONs, a termination command that can specify the last OPTION may be set. For example, with the OPTION "FFFFFFH" as a dummy command, the effect control device 300 may determine that there is no further OPTION reception by receiving the OPTION "FFFFFFH".

Further, when the variation pattern command can include two or more OPTIONs, the OPTIONs may be connected by a predetermined command. For example, with "3AH" as a special command, the effect control device 300 determines that an additional OPTION is received by receiving the special command "3AH" after receiving the OPTION, and issues the special command "3AH". It may be determined not to receive the additional OPTION by not receiving. Since the special command "3AH" means the character ";" in the ASCII code, the test apparatus 851 can easily generate a variation pattern command from a character string including two or more options connected by the character ";". can.

Further, when the variation pattern command can include two or more OPTIONs, it is assumed that the OPTIONs are connected by a predetermined command, but the OPTIONs can be connected by an arbitrary data pattern such as a predetermined bit string or a predetermined bit length. It may be something that makes it possible to determine the end.

Next, the effect distribution process of the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect distribution process of the first modification of the sixth embodiment. The effect distribution process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in step D56 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51). The control unit executes the effect distribution process when the received MODE is within the range of "C0H" to "D2H".

[Step D321] The control unit acquires a command MODE and a command ACTION.
[Step D322] The control unit determines whether or not the command ACTION is received. The control unit proceeds to step D323 when the command ACTION is not received, and proceeds to step D326 when the command OPTION is received.

[Step D323] The control unit selects a distribution table set based on the command MODE and the command ACTION.
[Step D324] The control unit determines and acquires a detailed variation pattern command by random number lottery using the first distribution table from the selected distribution table set.

[Step D325] The control unit determines whether or not the distribution is completed based on whether or not there is a distribution point corresponding to the selected detailed fluctuation pattern command. The control unit proceeds to step D323 when the distribution is not completed (there is a distribution point), and proceeds to step D328 when the distribution is completed (there is no distribution point).

[Step D326] The control unit acquires one command ACTION.
[Step D327] The control unit determines whether or not all the commands ACTION have been acquired. The control unit proceeds to step D326 when all the command OPTIONs have not been acquired, and proceeds to step D328 when all the command OPTIONs have been acquired.

[Step D328] The control unit obtains the detailed variation pattern number by referring to the relation table 853 and using the detailed variation pattern command as a key. As a result, the effect control device 300 can acquire the detailed fluctuation pattern number regardless of whether or not the command OPTION is received and regardless of the number of distribution points.

[Step D329] The control unit executes the effect pattern setting process for setting a specific effect pattern based on the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and ends the effect distribution process.
Such a gaming machine 10 makes it possible to specify the details of the effect control performed by the effect control device 300 from the outside, and can reduce the development burden of the program of the effect control device 300. Further, even if the details of the effect control performed by the effect control device 300 can be specified from the outside, the game machine 10 does not increase the control load of the game control device 100.

It should be noted that some OPTIONs may specify the detailed variation pattern command selection by random number lottery without corresponding to the detailed variation pattern command. In this case, the effect control device 300 may determine whether to acquire the detailed variation pattern command by the command ACTION or the detailed variation pattern command by the random number lottery for each distribution point. As a result, the effect control device 300 selects the detailed variation pattern command specified in OPTION for the distribution tables FT1 to FT4 from the distribution tables FT1 to FT5, and the detailed variation pattern determined by random number lottery for the distribution table FT5. You can select a command. Such a gaming machine 10 contributes to the improvement of the development efficiency of the effect control device 300.

The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effect control based on an external command. The effect control means includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321) and a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit defines the correspondence between the first table data (for example, the distribution table) that defines the distribution of the internal command (detailed fluctuation pattern command (OPTION)) and the internal command and the effect pattern. Stores table data (for example, relational tables). When the external command (variation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit performs a distribution lottery of the internal command using the first table data, and uses the sorted internal command and the second table data. When the external command includes an internal command, the effect pattern (detailed variation pattern number) is determined using the internal command included in the external command and the second table data.

(2) The gaming machine 10 includes a main control means (game control device 100) for performing game control and a slave control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effect control based on an external command of the main control means. .. The slave control means includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321) and a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit defines the correspondence between the first table data (for example, the distribution table) that defines the distribution of the internal command (detailed fluctuation pattern command (OPTION)) and the internal command and the effect pattern. Stores table data (for example, relational tables). When the external command (variation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit performs a distribution lottery of the internal command using the first table data, and uses the sorted internal command and the second table data. When the external command includes an internal command, the effect pattern (detailed variation pattern number) is determined using the internal command included in the external command and the second table data.

(3) The gaming machine 10 includes a main control means (game control device 100) for performing game control and a slave control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effect control based on an external command of the main control means. .. The slave control means includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321) and a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit defines the correspondence between the first table data (for example, the distribution table) that defines the distribution of the internal command (detailed fluctuation pattern command (OPTION)) and the internal command and the effect pattern. Stores table data (for example, relational tables). When the external command (variation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit performs a distribution lottery of the internal command using the first table data, and uses the sorted internal command and the second table data. The effect pattern (detailed fluctuation pattern number) is determined, and when the external command includes the first internal command and does not include the connection command (for example, the special command "3AH"), the first internal command included in the external command is used. The effect pattern is determined using the second table data, and when the external command includes the first internal command and the connection command, the second internal command and the second table following the first internal command and the connection command. The production pattern is determined using the data.

(4) The gaming machine 10 includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effect control based on an external command. The effect control means includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321) and a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit defines the correspondence between the first table data (for example, the distribution table) that defines the distribution of the internal command (detailed fluctuation pattern command (OPTION)) and the internal command and the effect pattern. Stores table data (for example, relational tables). When the external command (variation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit performs a distribution lottery of the internal command using the first table data, and sorts the sorted internal command and the second table data. The effect pattern (detailed variation pattern number) is determined by using, and when the external command includes the first internal command and does not include the connection command (for example, the special command "3AH"), the first internal included in the external command. The effect pattern is determined using the command and the second table data, and when the external command includes the first internal command and the connection command, the second internal command and the second internal command following the first internal command and the connection command are used. The effect pattern is determined using the table data of 2.

(5) The control unit of (4) determines the presence / absence of a connection command after receiving (acquiring) the first internal command, and receives (acquires) the second internal command when it is determined that there is a connection command. If it is determined that there is no connection command, the second internal command will not be received (acquired).

(6) The control unit of (4) receives (acquires) a connection command as an independent command different from the internal command.
(7) The connection command of (4) is a data pattern corresponding to a predetermined character string of one or more characters.

(8) The connection command of (4) is a predetermined data pattern included in the first internal command.
[7th Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment enables a required operation by a gaming hall staff when the front frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 in the installation environment in the gaming field. First, the required operating environment of the game machine 10 by the game hall staff will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a perspective view (No. 1) showing an example of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment. The gaming machines 10 of the first to sixth embodiments have the same configuration.

FIG. 125 shows how the gaming machine 10 opens the front frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. The gaming machine 10 has an outer frame 11 fixed to a game hall facility generally called an island, and the front frame 12 is opened so that maintenance work can be performed by a staff member. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 is excellent in workability in the installation environment on the open side rather than the shaft support side that pivotally supports the front frame 12 on the outer frame 11. In particular, in recent gaming machines, since the amount of protrusion of the front side component of the front frame 12 (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the upper plate 21) is large, the front frame 12 is used for the game hall equipment (for example, the calling lamp). Or, it may interfere with the card unit or the like, and the opening amount of the front frame 12 may be limited.

The required operations by the game hall staff include, for example, a set value confirmation operation, a set value change operation, an operation operation including a RAM clear operation, a maintenance operation including a wiring connection confirmation, and the like.

The front frame 12 includes a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, a payout control device 200, and a power supply device 400 on the back surface side of the front frame 12. Further, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 are provided on the back surface side of the game board 30.

The game control device 100 includes a status display device 135, a probability setting value display device 136, a setting value change switch 126, a setting key switch 127, and a RAM initialization switch 112 facing the back side of the front frame 12.

By opening the front frame 12 in the installation environment of the game hall, the game machine 10 facilitates the operation operation by the game hall staff. In other words, the gaming machine 10 makes operational operations difficult when the front frame 12 is not opened in the installation environment of the gaming field, for example, when the player is playing a game.

By accepting the operation of the setting key switch 127, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to confirm the set value by the probability setting value display device 136. Further, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to confirm the state of the gaming machine 10 by the status display device 135. Further, the gaming machine 10 accepts the operation of the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127, so that the set value can be changed while displaying the set value on the probability setting value display device 136. Further, the gaming machine 10 makes it possible to clear the RAM 111C by accepting the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112.

The operation operation of the gaming machine 10 by the gaming hall staff is performed by opening the front frame 12 in the installation environment of the gaming field. Therefore, the game hall staff will perform the operation operation by looking into the back surface side of the front frame 12 in the open state of the front frame 12. Therefore, the game hall staff mainly grasps the operation state from the state display device 135 and the probability set value display device 136 provided on the back surface side of the front frame 12.

Therefore, the gaming machine 10 supports grasping the operating state of the game hall staff by the effect device provided on the front side of the front frame 12. Next, the effect device provided on the front side of the front frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a perspective view (No. 2) showing an example of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 includes speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b on the front side of the front frame 12. The speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R) are provided on the upper portion of the front frame 12 (see FIG. 1), and the speakers 19a (L) are provided on the left side when viewed from the front side of the front frame 12, and the speakers 19a (L) are provided on the right side. R) is provided. Further, the speaker 19b is provided at the lower right of the front frame 12 and above the operation unit 24 (see FIG. 1). The speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b can independently output sound. The speaker 19a (L) cannot be directly observed from the back surface side of the front frame 12, but is located at the upper right portion when viewed from the back surface side of the front frame 12. Further, the speaker 19a (R) cannot be directly observed from the back surface side of the front frame 12, but is located at the upper left portion when viewed from the back surface side of the front frame 12. Further, the speaker 19b cannot be directly observed from the back surface side of the front frame 12, but is located at the lower left side when viewed from the back surface side of the front frame 12.

The speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), and 19b are provided on the front side of the front frame 12 to play a game effect, and support the grasp of the operation state of the game hall staff by the sound output during the operation operation.

Further, the gaming machine 10 is a central portion on the front side of the front frame 12, and is provided with a display device 41 at the central portion of the gaming board 30. The display device 41 cannot be directly observed from the back surface side of the front frame 12, but is also located in the central portion when viewed from the back surface side of the front frame 12. The display device 41 is provided on the front side of the front frame 12 and is responsible for the game effect, but at the time of operation operation, the operation state by the game hall staff can be guided to a third party by video output.

It should be noted that the notification and guidance of the operation status by these effect devices (speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), 19b, display device 41) do not necessarily have the same amount of information as the status display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136. It does not have to have.

Next, the control state after the power is turned on in the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of a control state after the power is turned on in the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 (gaming control device 100) shifts from the control state S0 to any of the control states S3 according to the input states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127 when the power is turned on. The game control device 100 shifts to the control state S0 (setting change state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 at the time of turning on the power is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S1 (setting confirmation state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 at the time of turning on the power is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S2 (RAM clear) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is OFF when the power is turned on. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S3 (power failure recovery) when the RAM initialization switch 112 at the time of turning on the power is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF.

Further, when the setting key switch 127 is turned off in the control state S0, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S5 (game state). Further, when the setting key switch 127 is turned off in the control state S1, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S3. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S5 after clearing the RAM in the control state S2. Further, when the game control device 100 detects a data abnormality (data abnormality in the power failure inspection area or checksum abnormality in the data backup area) in the control state S3, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S4 (abnormality) and causes a data abnormality in the control state S3. If it is not detected (that is, the data is normal), the control state S5 is entered.

The game control device 100 clears the RAM in the control state S0 (setting change state) and accepts the operation of changing the set value. The game control device 100 transmits a RAM initialization (RAM clear) command and a probability setting changing command to the effect control device 300 in the control state S0. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S0, and notifies the RAM clear and the setting change state by using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value being changed in the probability setting value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value being changed on the probability setting value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is in the changed state by the effect device.

Further, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S0 to the control state S5. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects the confirmation of the changed set value and notifies the determination of the set value by using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value determined by the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value confirmed by the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the set value has been confirmed by the effect device.

The game control device 100 transmits a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 in the control state S1 (setting confirmation state). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S1 and notifies the setting confirmation state by using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value set in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value set in the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is confirmed by the effect device.

Further, the game control device 100 transmits a probability confirmation end command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S1 to the control state S3 (power failure recovery). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects the end of the setting confirmation state and notifies the end of the setting confirmation state by using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 ends the display of the set value in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the end of the setting confirmation state on the probability setting value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting confirmation state has been completed by the effect device. The game control device 100 may not transmit the probability confirmation end command, and the effect control device 300 may receive the command (in that case, the command received with the transition from the control state S3 to the control state S5). The end of the setting confirmation status may be detected by receiving the power failure recovery command).

The game control device 100 transmits a RAM initialization command to the effect control device 300 in the control state S2 (RAM clear). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S2, and notifies that the RAM has been cleared by using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value set in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value set in the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is confirmed by the effect device.

When the game control device 100 detects a data abnormality in the control state S3 (power failure recovery), the game control device 100 sends a setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 and terminates abnormally. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 has terminated abnormally, and guides the setting change instruction using the effect device because the normal set value is lost. Further, the game control device 100 hides the probability set value display device 136.

The game control device 100 transmits a power failure recovery command to the effect control device 300 when the normal data is detected in the control state S3. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S5, and waits for the reception of the effect control command. Further, the game control device 100 hides the probability set value display device 136 and displays the state in the state display device 135. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the transition to the gaming state, and can confirm the transition to the gaming state by resuming the gaming effect in the effect device.

The state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 may be a common display device, function as the probability setting value display device 136 in the control states S0 and S1, and the state display device 135 in the control state S5. It may function as.

In addition, the game machine 10 instead of notifying the effect control device 300 that the RAM initialization has occurred by transmitting the RAM initialization command from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the command during the probability setting change. Or the transmission of the probability setting confirmation command may be used to notify the effect control device 300 that the RAM has been initialized. In this case, the gaming machine 10 can notify the RAM clear even if the transmission of the RAM initialization command from the gaming control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is omitted.

Next, guidance or notification of the control state in the effect device will be described. First, the transition timing from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart at the time of transition from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) according to the seventh embodiment.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 at the time of turning on the power is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the gaming machine 10 shifts to the control state S0 and executes RAM clear at the timing t0. The gaming machine 10 is in the control state S0 as long as the setting key switch 127 is ON even if the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned OFF at the timing t1.

In the game machine 10, the set value is initialized to "0" after the RAM is cleared in the control state S0, and each time the pressing operation of the set value change switch 126 is detected, the game machine 10 is incremented by "1", and when the maximum set value is exceeded, " Return to "0". For example, the gaming machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the set value change switch 126 at the timing t2 and updates the set value to "1", and detects the pressing operation of the set value change switch 126 at the timing t3 and sets the set value. Update to "2".

The gaming machine 10 detects OFF of the setting key switch 127 at the timing t4, confirms the update of the set value, and shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S5. At this time, the gaming machine 10 uses the effect device to notify the setting change and the RAM clear.

Next, the notification mode of the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding the RAM clear will be described. First, the notification mode of the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding the RAM clear in the display device 41, which is one of the effect devices, will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode for notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the display device of the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command transmitted by the game control device 100 in the control state S0, and causes the display device 41 to display the display screen 860 (FIG. 129 (1)). It notifies about setting change and notification about RAM clear. At this time, since the effect control device 300 has not yet received the command related to the game control, the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862 are displayed against the background of the initial setting display (for example, the front single color). indicate. For example, the RAM initialization notification display 861 includes the display code "01" and the message "RAM has been initialized" in the display contents. Further, the display 862 during the probability setting change includes the display code "02" and the message "setting value changing operation in progress" in the display contents. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can guide the content of the notification by a message, and can grasp the detailed control state corresponding to the display code by referring to the instruction manual or the like. The gaming machine 10 includes a display code and a message in the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862, but may include either one. The effect control device 300 displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862 during the control state S0, so that the display device 41 can easily grasp the control state of the gaming machine 10. The effect control device 300 may display the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862 by using effects such as blinking display and scroll display.

The effect control device 300 determines the probability setting to be transmitted by the game control device 100 at the transition timing from the control state S0 to the control state S5 (may be the timing immediately before the transition or the timing immediately after the transition). Upon receiving the command, the display screen 863 (FIG. 129 (2)) is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the setting change. At this time, if the effect control device 300 has not yet received the command related to the game control, the effect control device 300 displays the probability setting confirmation display 864 against the background of the initial setting display. For example, the probability setting confirmation display 864 includes the display code "03" and the message "change of setting value accepted" in the display contents. The effect control device 300 further displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 in order to ensure the notification regarding the RAM clear. The effect control device 300 displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 until the command related to the game control is received, so that the display device 41 can easily grasp the control state of the game machine 10. enable. The effect control device 300 may display the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 by using effects such as blinking display and scroll display.

The effect control device 300 receives a command related to the game control (for example, a customer waiting command) transmitted by the game control device 100 in the control state S5, and causes the display device 41 to display the display screen 865 (FIG. 129 (3)). .. The effect control device 300 notifies the setting change until the predetermined notification end trigger is established even after the transition to the control state S5. At this time, after receiving the command related to the game control, the effect control device 300 displays the probability setting confirmation display 864 against the background of the corresponding in-game display (for example, the customer waiting screen 866). The effect control device 300 further displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 in order to ensure the notification regarding the RAM clear. The effect control device 300 displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 until the notification end trigger is established, so that the display device 41 can be used to display the game machine 10 even after the game control has started. The control status can be easily grasped. The effect control device 300 may display the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 by using effects such as blinking display and scroll display. The notification end trigger is a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), a predetermined condition is satisfied (a blockage detection of the front frame 12, a game start detection by winning detection, etc., and a predetermined number of times of execution of a variable display game (for example, special feature). Figure: Game variation display once execution), push button 25 pressing operation detection, etc.).

Further, the gaming machine 10 displays the notification content started during the opening of the front frame 12 in order to ensure the notification in the display device 41 to the game hall staff, and the predetermined notification ends after the opening of the front frame 12 is completed. It may be continued until the trigger is established (for example, the elapse of a predetermined period or the detection of the push button 25 pressing operation).

Next, a notification mode for notification regarding setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the speakers 19a and 19b (sound output device), which is one of the effect devices, will be described. First, FIG. 130 will be described with respect to a notification mode by sound output control for each of a plurality of channels prepared for sound output. FIG. 130 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a notification mode for notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100, and notifies from the speakers 19a and 19b using a plurality of channels prepared for sound output from the timing t0. Sound A and notification sound B are output as sounds. For example, the effect control device 300 repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B in synchronization with the channel 1 and the channel 2 (FIG. 130 (1)). Then, the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100, and uses the plurality of channels prepared for sound output from the timing t4 to notify the notification sound A and the notification sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Sound output with C. For example, the effect control device 300 repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C in synchronization with the channel 1 and the channel 2. Then, the effect control device 300 switches the sound output from the channel that repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C to the game control sound D from the timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.

The notification sound A includes an alarm sound for notifying the RAM clear (for example, an electronic sound "pune, pune") and a message for notifying the RAM clear (for example, "RAM has been initialized"). The notification sound A may include either an alarm sound or a message.

Further, the notification sound B includes a warning sound 1 (for example, an electronic sound "Pippi, Pippi") for notifying that the probability setting is being changed and a message for notifying that the probability setting is being changed (for example, "the probability setting is being changed"). including. The notification sound B may include either one of the alert sound 1 and the message.

Further, the notification sound C includes a warning sound 2 (for example, an electronic sound "Helicobacter pylori") for notifying the probability setting confirmation and a message for notifying the probability setting confirmation (for example, "the probability setting has been changed"). including. The notification sound C may include either one of the alert sound 2 and the message. Further, the game control sound D includes a BGM and a sound effect according to the game control state.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound B. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound C. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can suitably inform the operator who is in the process of changing the probability setting that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting is being changed. Further, it is preferable that the gaming machine 10 is changing the probability setting for the operator because the notification sound of the RAM clear does not interfere with the notification sound during the probability setting change work during the probability setting change work. I can guide you. Further, the gaming machine 10 can preferably inform the operator who has performed the probability setting change work that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting has been confirmed (completed). Further, since the RAM clear notification sound does not interfere with the probability setting confirmation notification sound when the probability setting is confirmed, the gaming machine 10 can preferably inform the operator that the probability setting has been confirmed. can. Such a gaming machine 10 can provide a good working environment for a worker who performs a setting operation.

Further, the effect control device 300 may make the notification sound different for each channel when the notification sound A and the notification sound B are output from the speakers 19a and 19b using a plurality of channels. For example, when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t0, the effect control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the channel 1 and the notification sound to the channel 2. B is assigned (FIG. 130 (2)). At this time, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B alternately so as not to output the sound at the overlapping timing. Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputs the sound from the timing t4, the notification sound A is assigned to the channel 1 and the notification sound C is assigned to the channel 2. At this time, the effect control device 300 alternately outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C so as not to output the sound at the overlapping timing. Then, the effect control device 300 switches channels 1 and 2 to the game control sound D from the timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.

Further, when the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B from the speakers 19a and 19b using a plurality of channels, the notification sound is different for each channel and different notification sounds are output. An interval period Δt may be provided between them (FIG. 130 (3)). For example, when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t0, the effect control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the channel 1 and the notification sound to the channel 2. Allocate B. Then, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A from the channel 1, waits for the interval period Δt, and then outputs the notification sound B from the channel 2. Similarly, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound B from the channel 2, waits for the interval period Δt, and then outputs the notification sound A from the channel 1. After that, the effect control device 300 repeats the same cycle. The effect control device 300 may set the interval period Δt as a silent period or an output period of a predetermined sound (for example, the interval sound “picone”). Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputs the sound from the timing t4, the effect sound A is assigned to the channel 1, the notification sound C is assigned to the channel 2, and the notification sound A is assigned. And the notification sound C set the interval period Δt when they are alternately output. Then, the effect control device 300 switches channels 1 and 2 to the game control sound D from the timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.

As shown in FIG. 130 (1), the effect control device 300 sets the interval period Δt when switching the notification sound even when the notification sound is repeatedly output in synchronization with the channel 1 and the channel 2. You may try to do it.

The gaming machine 10 may allocate a specific channel to a specific speaker. For example, of the speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R), the speaker 19a (L) outputs the notification sound set for the channel 1 and does not output the notification sound set for the channel 2. Further, the speaker 19a (R) outputs the notification sound set for the channel 2 and does not output the notification sound set for the channel 1.

Next, FIG. 131 will be described with respect to a notification mode by sound output control for each of a plurality of speakers prepared for sound output. FIG. 131 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of a notification mode for notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100, and a plurality of speakers 19a (L), 19a (R) prepared for sound output from the timing t0. , 19b is used to output the notification sound A and the notification sound B. For example, the effect control device 300 repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B in synchronization with the speaker L (speaker 19a (L)) and the speaker R (speaker 19a (R)) (FIG. 131 (1). )). Then, the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100, and outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C from the speaker L and the speaker R from the timing t4. For example, the effect control device 300 repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C in synchronization with the speaker L and the speaker R. Then, the effect control device 300 transfers the sound output from the speaker L and the speaker R, which repeatedly output the notification sound A and the notification sound C, to the game control sound D from the timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4. Switch.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound B. Further, the gaming machine 10 can suppress the simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound C. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can suitably inform the operator who is in the process of changing the probability setting that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting is being changed. Further, it is preferable that the gaming machine 10 is changing the probability setting for the operator because the notification sound of the RAM clear does not interfere with the notification sound during the probability setting change work during the probability setting change work. I can guide you. Further, the gaming machine 10 can preferably inform the operator who has performed the probability setting change work that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting has been confirmed (completed). Further, since the RAM clear notification sound does not interfere with the probability setting confirmation notification sound when the probability setting is confirmed, the gaming machine 10 can preferably inform the operator that the probability setting has been confirmed. can. Such a gaming machine 10 can provide a good working environment for a worker who performs a setting operation.

Further, the effect control device 300 may make the notification sound different for each speaker when the notification sound A and the notification sound B are output from the speaker L and the speaker R. For example, when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t0, the effect control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the speaker L and the notification sound to the speaker R. B is assigned (FIG. 131 (2)). At this time, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B alternately so as not to output the sound at the overlapping timing. Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputs the sound from the timing t4, the notification sound A is assigned to the speaker L and the notification sound C is assigned to the speaker R. At this time, the effect control device 300 alternately outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C so as not to output the sound at the overlapping timing. Then, the effect control device 300 switches the speakers L and R to the game control sound D from the timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.

Further, when the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B from the speaker L and the speaker R, the notification sound is made different for each speaker, and the interval period is between the output of the different notification sounds. Δt may be provided (FIG. 131 (3)). For example, when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs a sound from the timing t0, the effect control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the speaker L and the notification sound to the speaker R. Assign B. Then, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L, waits for the interval period Δt, and then outputs the notification sound B from the speaker R. Similarly, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound B from the speaker R, waits for the interval period Δt, and then outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L. After that, the effect control device 300 repeats the same cycle. The effect control device 300 may set the interval period Δt as a silent period or an output period of a predetermined sound (for example, the interval sound “picone”). Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputs the sound from the timing t4, the effect control device 300 assigns the notification sound A to the speaker L, assigns the notification sound C to the speaker R, and notifies the notification sound A. And the notification sound C are alternately output, and the interval period Δt is set. Then, the effect control device 300 switches the speakers L and R to the game control sound D from the timing t6 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4.

As shown in FIG. 131 (1), the effect control device 300 sets the interval period Δt when switching the notification sound even when the notification sound is repeatedly output in synchronization with the speaker L and the speaker R. You may try to do it.

In the gaming machine 10, the speakers that output different notification sounds are set according to the left-right arrangement of the gaming machine 10, but may be set according to the vertical arrangement or the speaker characteristics such as high-pitched sound and low-pitched sound output.

Next, FIG. 132 will explain a notification mode in which different notification sounds are simultaneously output and controlled by a plurality of speakers prepared for sound output. FIG. 132 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of a notification mode for notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding RAM clear in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100, and a plurality of speakers 19a (L), 19a (R) prepared for sound output from the timing t0. , 19b is used to control the sound output of the notification sound A and the notification sound B. For example, the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t0, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound A by the speaker L (speaker 19a (L)). Further, the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t0, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound B by the speaker R (speaker 19a (R)). Then, the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100, switches the notification sound from the timing t4 to start the sound output control, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound A by the speaker L. Further, the effect control device 300 switches the notification sound from the timing t4 to start the sound output control, and the speaker R repeatedly outputs the notification sound C. Then, the effect control device 300 repeatedly outputs the sound output from the speaker L that repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the speaker R that repeatedly outputs the notification sound C from the timing t6 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4. The game control sound D is switched to and the sound output control is started.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 simultaneously controls the sound output of the notification sound A and the notification sound B. As described above, the effect control device 300 eliminates the need for control at different timings by simultaneously performing sound output control of different notification sounds, so that the control load can be suppressed.

The output mode of different notification sounds in the case of controlling the sound output of different notification sounds at the same time will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of output modes of different notification sounds in the case where different notification sounds of the seventh embodiment are simultaneously sound output controlled. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of output modes of different notification sounds in the case where different notification sounds of the seventh embodiment are simultaneously sound output controlled.

The effect control device 300 starts sound output control from the timing t4, outputs the notification sound A by the speaker L (speaker 19a (L)), and outputs the notification sound C by the speaker R (speaker 19a (R)). (Fig. 133 (1)).

At this time, the speaker L is on the shaft support side of the front frame 12, and the speaker R is on the open end side of the front frame 12. Therefore, when a worker (for example, a game hall staff member) opens the front frame 12 to perform setting change work or setting confirmation work, the sound output from the speaker R is heard more than the sound output from the speaker L. Cheap.

Therefore, even when the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output at the same time (FIG. 133 (2)), the effect control device 300 causes the notification sound A to be output from the speaker L on the shaft support side. By outputting the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side, the notification effect of the notification sound related to the work of the operator is ensured.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 outputs a notification sound having a small degree of relevance to the worker's work from the speaker L on the shaft support side, and outputs a notification sound having a large degree of relevance to the work of the worker to the speaker on the open end side. Although it is assumed that the sound is output from R, a speaker that outputs the notification sound may be set according to the presence or absence of the degree of relevance to the work of the operator, the work procedure, and the like.

Further, the effect control device 300 may exclusively output the sound so that the notification sound A and the notification sound C are not output at the same time (FIG. 133 (3)). For example, when the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t4, the notification sound A is immediately output from the speaker L on the shaft support side and muted at the timing t4a. On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t4, the sound output is output in the mute state, and the notification sound C is output from the speaker R on the open end side after waiting for the timing t4a.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the shaft support side and outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side, while the notification sound related to the work of the operator. The notification effect of is more preferably secured. The effect control device 300 first outputs sound from the speaker L on the shaft support side and then outputs sound from the speaker R on the open end side with a delay, but first outputs sound from the speaker R on the open end side. Then, the sound may be output from the speaker L on the shaft support side after a delay. Further, the effect control device 300 first outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L and then outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R with a delay, but the notification sound has a large degree of relevance to the work of the operator. The sound C may be output from the speaker L first, and the notification sound A having a small degree of relevance to the work of the operator may be output from the speaker R later.

Further, if the sound output at the maximum volume of the notification sound A and the sound output at the maximum volume of the notification sound C are exclusive, the effect control device 300 allows the sound output to overlap at some timings. You may. For example, when the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t4, the notification sound A is immediately output from the speaker L on the shaft support side and muted at the timing t4b (FIG. 133 (4)). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t4, the notification sound C is turned up on the open end side while fading in from the mute state of the timing t4 to the maximum volume state of the timing t4b. Sound is output from the speaker R.

Further, when the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t4, the notification sound C is immediately output from the speaker L on the shaft support side and muted while fading out from the timing t4c (FIG. 134 (1)). .. On the other hand, when the sound output control is started from the timing t4, the effect control device 300 outputs the sound in the mute state, waits for the timing t4c, and outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the shaft support side.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the shaft support side and outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side, and the maximum volumes of the two notification sounds overlap. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has both the guarantee of the notification effect of the two notification sounds and the guarantee of the notification effect of the notification sounds related to the work of the operator.

It is assumed that the effect control device 300 fades in (FIG. 133 (4)) or fades out (FIG. 134 (1)) for one of the notification sounds, but fades in or fades out for each of the two notification sounds. May be good. For example, the effect control device 300 may output the notification sound A and the notification sound C by fading in, may output the notification sound A and the notification sound C by fading out, or may output the notification sound A. May be output by fading in and the notification sound C may be output by fading out, or the notification sound C may be output as sound by fading in and the notification sound A may be output as sound by fading out.

Further, although the effect control device 300 is set to fade in (FIG. 133 (4)) or fade out (FIG. 134 (1)) for one notification sound, the effect control device 300 may be set to fade in and fade out for one notification sound. However, both (all) notification sounds may be faded in and faded out.

Further, when the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t4, the notification sound A is output from the speaker L on the shaft support side at a suppressed volume, and the notification sound C is output in a mute state. Waiting for the timing t4d, the speaker R on the open end side outputs a sound at a volume higher than the notification sound A (for example, the maximum volume) (FIG. 134 (2)).

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300. Although the effect control device 300 is supposed to wait for the timing t4d to output the notification sound C, the sound may be output immediately from the timing t4.

In FIG. 133 (3), the effect control device 300 exclusively outputs the sound so that the notification sound A and the notification sound C are not output at the same time, but instead of muting one of the sounds. The sound output may be suppressed. For example, the effect control device 300 outputs an unsuppressed sound (for example, maximum volume) when the sound output control is started from the timing t4 and the notification sound A is sound output controlled from the speaker L on the shaft support side at the timing t4. After that, the timing t4a is waited for and the suppression sound is output. On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 controls the sound output of the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side at the timing t4, the effect control device 300 outputs the suppression sound and then waits for the timing t4a to output the non-suppression sound. The suppressed sound may be one that suppresses the volume, or may be one that suppresses the notification mode (notification message or warning sound, replacement or deletion of alert sound, insertion of interval period, etc.). ..

Further, when the sound output control is started from the timing t4, the effect control device 300 periodically changes the volume so that the volume of the notification sound A becomes the maximum at the timing t4e and the volume of the notification sound A becomes the minimum at the timing t4f. You may let it. At this time, the effect control device 300 periodically changes the volume so that the volume of the notification sound C becomes the minimum at the timing t4e and the volume of the notification sound C becomes the maximum at the timing t4f (FIG. 134 (3)). ).

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 sets a half-cycle time lag at the timing at which the notification sound A and the notification sound C reach the maximum volume, but the timing at which the notification sound A and the notification sound C reach the maximum volume does not overlap. If so, it is not limited to a half cycle.

Further, when the effect control device 300 exclusively outputs the sound so that the notification sound A and the notification sound C are not output at the same time, the number of notifications is the same in the notification example shown in FIG. 133 (3). , The number of notifications may be different (FIG. 134 (4)). For example, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the shaft support side three times by the timing t4g when the sound output control is started from the timing t4, and outputs the notification sound C to the speaker R on the open end side. Sound is output once from.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300. Further, the gaming machine 10 can provide a difference in the notification effect between the notification sound A and the notification sound C. The effect control device 300 is said to provide a difference in the notification effect between the notification sound A and the notification sound C by different the number of notifications, but the difference in the notification time is the difference in the notification effect between the notification sound A and the notification sound C. May be provided.

Although the case where the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output as sounds has been described, other combinations of notification sounds such as the notification sound A and the notification sound B can also be applied. Further, although the case where the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output by the speaker L and the speaker R has been described, the combination of other speakers such as the speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R) and the speaker 19b is also applied. It is possible. Further, although the case where the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output by the speaker L and the speaker R has been described, the combination of two or more channels such as channel 1 and channel 2 can also be applied.

Next, the power-on notification setting process of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the power-on notification setting process according to the seventh embodiment. The power-on notification setting process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in step D62 of the receive command analysis process (see FIG. 51). The control unit executes the power-on notification setting process when the received command is a RAM initialization command, a probability setting changing command, a probability setting checking command, or a probability setting change instruction command.

[Step D331] The control unit determines whether or not the command during the probability setting change has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D332 when the command during the probability setting change is received, and proceeds to step D334 when the command is not received.

[Step D332] The control unit sets the RAM clear notification and the setting changing (probability setting changing) notification. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification and probability setting changing notification by the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.). The control unit is trying to reduce the control load by simultaneously performing the RAM clear notification and the probability setting changing notification.

[Step D333] The control unit sets an end trigger for RAM clear notification and notification during setting change (probability setting change). For example, the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the setting changing notification is a transition from the control state S0 to the control state S5. The control unit ends the power-on notification setting process after setting the end triggers for the RAM clear notification and the setting changing notification.

[Step D334] The control unit determines whether or not the command during probability setting confirmation has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D335 when the command during probability setting confirmation is received, and proceeds to step D337 when the command is not received.

[Step D335] The control unit sets the notification during setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation). As a result, the effect control device 300 uses the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) to perform notification during probability setting confirmation.

[Step D336] The control unit sets the end trigger of the notification during setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation). For example, the end trigger of the probability setting confirmation notification is the transition from the control state S1 to the control state S3. The control unit ends the power-on notification setting process after setting the end trigger of the probability setting confirmation notification.

[Step D337] The control unit determines whether or not the RAM initialization command has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D338 when the RAM initialization command is received, and proceeds to step D340 when the RAM initialization command is not received.

[Step D338] The control unit sets the RAM clear (RAM initialization) notification. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification by the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.).

[Step D339] The control unit sets the end trigger of the RAM clear notification. For example, the end trigger of the RAM clear notification is the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, the elapse of 30 seconds) after the transition from the control state S2 to the control state S5. The control unit ends the power-on notification setting process after setting the end trigger of the RAM clear notification.

[Step D340] The control unit sets the probability setting change instruction notification because the received command is neither a RAM initialization command, a probability setting changing command, nor a probability setting checking command, that is, a probability setting change instruction command. do. As a result, the effect control device 300 uses the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) to notify the probability setting change instruction. The control unit ends the power-on notification setting process after setting the probability setting change instruction notification. Since the control unit of the game control device 100 prohibits RAM access and waits for a restart after transmitting the probability setting change instruction command, the control unit of the effect control device 300 is a trigger for ending the probability setting change instruction notification. Does not require a set of.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can perform notification according to the control state when the power is turned on.
Next, the power-on notification end setting process of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the power-on notification end setting process according to the seventh embodiment. The power-on notification end setting process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in step D62 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51). The control unit executes the power-on notification end setting process when the notification set in the power-on notification setting process is being executed or when the notification set in the power-on notification end setting process is being executed. ..

[Step D341] The control unit determines whether or not the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the setting changing notification is established. The control unit proceeds to step D342 when the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the setting changing notification is established, and proceeds to step D344 when it is not established.

[Step D342] The control unit ends the RAM clear notification and the setting changing notification, and sets the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation) notification. As a result, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification and probability setting confirmation notification by the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.).

[Step D343] The control unit sets an end trigger for the RAM clear notification and the probability setting (probability setting confirmation) notification. For example, the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification is a predetermined period elapsed (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed) from the start of the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification. The control unit ends the notification end setting process when the power is turned on after setting the end triggers of the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification.

[Step D344] The control unit determines whether or not the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation) notification is satisfied. The control unit proceeds to step D345 when the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification is established, and proceeds to step D346 when the end trigger is not established.

[Step D345] The control unit ends (clears) the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification, and ends the power-on notification end setting process.
[Step D346] The control unit determines whether or not the setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation) notification end trigger has been established. The control unit proceeds to step D347 when the end trigger of the probability setting confirmation notification is established, and proceeds to step D348 when it is not established.

[Step D347] The control unit ends (clears) the notification during setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation), and ends the notification end setting process when the power is turned on.
[Step D348] The control unit determines whether or not the end trigger of the RAM clear notification is established. The control unit proceeds to step D349 when the RAM clear notification end trigger is established, and ends the power-on notification end setting process when the RAM clear notification end trigger is not established.

[Step D349] The control unit ends (clears) the RAM clear notification, and ends the notification end setting process when the power is turned on.
As a result, the gaming machine 10 can perform notification according to the control state when the power is turned on.

In the power-on notification setting process, the control unit considers that the RAM is initialized by receiving the command during the probability setting change because the probability setting change involves RAM clear, but the command during the probability setting change in step D331. In addition to the reception of, the reception of the RAM initialization command may be added to the judgment requirement. That is, the control unit determines whether or not the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command have been received, and if the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command are received, the process proceeds to step D332 to proceed to the RAM initialization. If the command for changing the probability and the command for changing the probability setting are not received, the process may proceed to step D334.

In this case, the control unit can change the notification mode and notification timing of RAM clear depending on whether or not another command (for example, a command during probability setting change) is received when the RAM initialization command is received. For example, when the effect control device 300 does not receive the command during the probability setting change when the RAM initialization command is received, the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) performs RAM clear notification, and the RAM is When the command for changing the probability setting is being received when the initialization command is received, the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) performs RAM clear notification and setting change notification.

In addition, the control unit determines whether or not the notification mode of RAM clear and the notification timing are different, whether or not other commands are received when the RAM initialization command is received, but from the reception of the RAM initialization command. It may be determined whether or not another command (for example, a command for changing the probability setting) is received within a predetermined time.

The change of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 140. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example (No. 4) of the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the seventh embodiment.

When the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 137 (1)), the effect control device 300 notifies the RAM clear notification up to the timing t10 by the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.). Do it.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting changing command and the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 137 (2)), the notification device provides a RAM clear notification and a setting changing notification (probability setting change). Medium notification). The effect control device 300 performs the setting confirmation notification (probability setting confirmation notification) only for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12 after performing the setting changing notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification from the timing t12 to the timing t13 further delayed by the period T2.

As described above, the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 137 (1)) and the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 137 (2)). Set a different notification period for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the conversion command. Such a gaming machine 10 can surely perform RAM clear notification according to the presence / absence of notification during setting change.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting changing command and the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 137 (3)), the notification device sets the RAM clear to non-notification and notifies the setting change. Do it. The effect control device 300 performs the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received, and then performs the setting confirmation notification only for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12. The effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification from the timing t12 to the timing t13 delayed by the period T2.

As described above, the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 137 (1)) and the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 137 (3)). Set a different notification start time for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the conversion command. Such a gaming machine 10 can surely perform RAM clear notification according to the presence / absence of notification during setting change.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 has different notification periods and notification start times of the RAM clear notification depending on whether or not a command during the probability setting change (may be another command such as a probability setting confirmation command) is received. The notification end time, notification volume, notification content, notification frequency, and other notification modes of the clear notification may be different.

When the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on, the effect control device 300 may provide a predetermined delay period Δt to notify the RAM clear up to the timing t10 by the notification device (FIG. 138 (FIG. 138). 1)).

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change during the predetermined delay period Δt set by receiving the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on, the delay period Δt has elapsed from the reception of the RAM initialization command. Later, the notification device may be used to perform RAM clear notification and setting changing notification (FIG. 138 (2)). The effect control device 300 performs the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received, and then performs the setting confirmation notification only for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification from the timing t12 to the timing t13 further delayed by the period T2.

Even in such a case, the effect control device 300 does not receive the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 138 (1)) and the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 138 (2)). Then, a different notification period is set for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the RAM initialization command. Such a gaming machine 10 can surely perform RAM clear notification regardless of the presence or absence of notification during setting change.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change during the predetermined delay period Δt set by receiving the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 139 (1)), the notification device is used. The RAM clear is set to non-notification and notification is performed while the setting is being changed. The effect control device 300 performs the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received, and then performs the setting confirmation notification only for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12. The effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification from the timing t12 to the timing t13 delayed by the period T2.

As described above, the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 138 (1)) and the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 139 (1)), and the RAM is initially set. Set a different notification start time for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the conversion command. Such a gaming machine 10 can surely perform RAM clear notification according to the presence / absence of notification during setting change.

Although the gaming machine 10 has different notification periods and notification start times for RAM clear notification depending on whether or not a command (other command) for which the probability setting is being changed is received, the notification end time, notification volume, and notification of RAM clear notification are different. The content, notification frequency, and other notification modes may be different.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change during the predetermined delay period Δt set by receiving the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on, the delay period Δt has elapsed from the reception of the RAM initialization command. Later, the RAM clear may be set to non-notification by the notification device to perform notification during the setting change (FIG. 139 (2)). The effect control device 300 performs the setting change notification until the timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received, and then performs the setting confirmation notification only for the period T1 from the timing t11 to the timing t12. Since the effect control device 300 executes the probability setting change and the RAM clear as a pair, the RAM clear that is naturally performed may be omitted by the notification during the setting change. That is, even when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on, it depends on whether or not the command during the probability setting change (may be another command such as the probability setting confirmation command) is received. Determine the pros and cons of RAM clear notification. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can omit the RAM clear notification that is naturally understood by the notification during the setting change. Such a gaming machine 10 can simplify the notification content and make it easier for the operator to grasp the situation.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 140 (1)), the speakers L, R, B (for example, the speakers 19a (L), the speakers 19a (R), the speakers). By 19b (B)), RAM clear notification is performed at the maximum volume up to timing t20.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the command for changing the probability setting and the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 140 (2)), the probability setting is confirmed by the speaker L (for example, the speaker 19a (L)). RAM clear notification is performed at a volume suppressed to the timing t21 when the command is received (for example, half of the maximum volume), a predetermined muffling period (for example, 10 seconds) is provided until the timing t22, and then a predetermined period (for example) at the maximum volume. , 30 seconds) RAM clear notification. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a setting changing notification (probability setting changing notification) at the maximum volume up to the timing t21 when the probability setting confirmation command is received by the speaker R (for example, the speaker 19a (R)). Further, the effect control device 300 performs setting confirmation notification (probability setting confirmation notification) at the maximum volume from timing t21 to timing t22 when the probability setting confirmation command is received by the speaker B (for example, speaker 19b).

As described above, the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 140 (1)) and the command during the probability setting change (FIG. 140 (2)). A different notification period, a different notification device, and a different notification intensity (for example, volume) are set for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the conversion command. Such a gaming machine 10 can surely perform RAM clear notification according to the presence / absence of notification during setting change.

Next, a modified example of the control state after the power is turned on in the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described with reference to FIG. 127 will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of a control state after the power is turned on in the gaming machine of the first modification of the seventh embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 (gaming control device 100) shifts from the control state S0 to any of the control states S3 according to the input states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127 when the power is turned on. The game control device 100 shifts to the control state S0 (setting change state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 at the time of turning on the power is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S1 (setting confirmation state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 at the time of turning on the power is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S2 (RAM clear) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is OFF when the power is turned on. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S3 (power failure recovery) when the RAM initialization switch 112 at the time of turning on the power is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF.

Further, when the setting key switch 127 is turned off in the control state S0, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S2 (RAM clear). Further, when the setting key switch 127 is turned off in the control state S1, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S3. Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S5 (game state) after clearing the RAM in the control state S2. Further, when the game control device 100 detects a data abnormality (data abnormality in the power failure inspection area or checksum abnormality in the data backup area) in the control state S3, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S4 (abnormality) and causes a data abnormality in the control state S3. If it is not detected (that is, the data is normal), the control state S5 is entered.

The game control device 100 transmits a command during the probability setting change to the effect control device 300 in the control state S0 (setting change state). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S0, and notifies the setting change state using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value being changed in the probability setting value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value being changed on the probability setting value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is in the changed state by the effect device.

Further, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S0 to the control state S2 (RAM clear). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects the confirmation of the changed set value, and notifies the determination of the set value using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value determined by the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value confirmed by the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the set value has been confirmed by the effect device. The game control device 100 may transmit a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 when the control state S0 shifts to the control state S2.

The game control device 100 transmits a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 in the control state S1 (setting confirmation state). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S1, and notifies the setting confirmation state using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value set in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value set in the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is confirmed by the effect device.

Further, the game control device 100 transmits a probability confirmation end command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S1 to the control state S3 (power failure recovery). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects the end of the setting confirmation state and notifies the end of the setting confirmation state using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 ends the display of the set value in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the end of the setting confirmation state on the probability setting value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting confirmation state has been completed by the effect device. The game control device 100 may not transmit the probability confirmation end command, and the effect control device 300 may receive the command (in that case, the command received with the transition from the control state S3 to the control state S5). The end of the setting confirmation status may be detected by receiving the power failure recovery command).

The game control device 100 transmits a RAM initialization (RAM clear) command to the effect control device 300 in the control state S2 (RAM clear). As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S2, and notifies that the RAM has been cleared by using the effect device. Further, the game control device 100 displays the set value set in the probability set value display device 136. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the set value set in the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is confirmed by the effect device.

When the game control device 100 detects a data abnormality in the control state S3 (power failure recovery), the game control device 100 sends a setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 and terminates abnormally. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 has terminated abnormally, and since the normal set value is lost, the effect device is used to guide the setting change instruction. Further, the game control device 100 hides the probability set value display device 136.

The game control device 100 transmits a power failure recovery command to the effect control device 300 when the normal data is detected in the control state S3. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S5, and waits for the reception of the effect control command. Further, the game control device 100 hides the probability set value display device 136 and displays the state in the state display device 135. As a result, the game hall staff can confirm the transition to the gaming state, and can confirm the transition to the gaming state by resuming the gaming effect in the effect device.

The state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 may be a common display device, function as the probability setting value display device 136 in the control states S0 and S1, and the state display device 135 in the control state S5. It may function as.

Next, the guidance or notification of the control state in the effect device of the gaming machine 10 of the modification 1 of the seventh embodiment will be described. First, the transition timing from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S2 (RAM clear) and the control state S5 (game state) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart at the time of transition from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) of the modification 1 of the seventh embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 shifts to the control state S0 when the RAM initialization switch 112 at the time of turning on the power is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON. The gaming machine 10 is in the control state S0 as long as the setting key switch 127 is ON even if the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned OFF at the timing t1. Since the gaming machine 10 accepts the execution reservation for clearing the RAM by shifting to the control state S0, the input state of the RAM initialization switch 112 after shifting to the control state S0 does not matter.

Each time the gaming machine 10 detects a pressing operation of the set value change switch 126, the preset set value is incremented by "1", and when the maximum set value is exceeded, the game machine 10 returns to "0". For example, the gaming machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the set value change switch 126 at the timing t2, updates the preset set value “5 (maximum value)” to “0”, and changes the set value at the timing t3. The pressing operation of the switch 126 is detected and the set value is updated to "1".

The gaming machine 10 detects the OFF of the setting key switch 127 at the timing t4, confirms the update of the set value, shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S2, clears the RAM in the control state S2, and controls after the RAM is cleared. It shifts to the state S5. However, the set value storage area is outside the initialization target area and is not initialized.

The gaming machine 10 uses the effect device to notify the setting change in the control state S0, and uses the effect device to notify the setting change confirmation and the RAM clear in the control state S2 and thereafter.

Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the seventh embodiment, the output mode of the notification sound differs depending on the installation position of the speaker. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing an example (No. 1) of output modes of different notification sounds in the case where different notification sounds of the second embodiment of the seventh embodiment are simultaneously sound output controlled. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example (No. 2) of output modes of different notification sounds in the case where different notification sounds of the second embodiment of the seventh embodiment are simultaneously sound output controlled. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example (No. 3) of output modes of different notification sounds in the case where different notification sounds of the second embodiment of the seventh embodiment are simultaneously sound output controlled.

As shown in FIG. 143 (1), the gaming machine 10 has a probability between the shaft support side speaker (for example, the speaker 19a (L)) and the open end side speaker (for example, the speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12. Performs setting change notification and RAM clear notification. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12, and the notification mode is different between when the front frame 12 is closed and when the front frame 12 is opened.

For example, when the front frame is closed, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound "setting is being changed. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" from both the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound "RAM cleared. RAM cleared. Setting is being changed. (Hereinafter, loop)" is output from the shaft support side speaker and notified from the open end side speaker. Sound "Settings are being changed. Settings are being changed. RAM has been cleared. (Loop below)" is output.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker, and the front frame 12 is opened so that the operator can easily hear the opening. The notification content that is highly relevant to the work content is weighted and notified from the end side speaker. Further, the gaming machine 10 weights the notification contents having a low relevance to the work contents from the shaft support side speaker located at a position where it is difficult for the worker who works by opening the front frame 12 to hear the different notification contents. Balance the notification effect.

The weighting for the notification content is not limited to the number of repetitions (number of notifications), and may be the notification time or the notification volume, or may be other as long as the notification effect can be different. ..

The game control device 100 can detect the opening of the front frame 12 by monitoring the input state of the main body frame opening detection switch 64, and the effect control device 300 detects the opening of the front frame 12 for game control. The opening of the front frame 12 can be detected by receiving a required command from the device 100.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can detect the setting change work, the setting confirmation work, and the RAM clear work by the operator by detecting the opening of the front frame 12. The opening detection of the front frame 12 is one aspect of the detection of the setting change work, the setting confirmation work, and the RAM clear work by the operator, and may be performed by another method.

Further, as shown in FIG. 143 (2), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability between the work position remote speaker (for example, the speaker 19a (L)) and the work position vicinity speaker (for example, the speaker 19b) of the front frame 12. The changing notification and the RAM clear notification may be performed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12, and the notification mode is different between when the front frame 12 is closed and when the front frame 12 is opened.

For example, when the front frame is closed, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound "setting is being changed. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" from both the work position remote speaker and the work position vicinity speaker. In addition, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound "RAM cleared. RAM cleared. Setting is being changed. (Hereinafter, loop)" is output from the work position remote speaker when the front frame is opened, and the notification is made from the speaker near the work position. Sound "Settings are being changed. Settings are being changed. RAM has been cleared. (Loop below)" is output.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the work position remote speaker and the work position vicinity speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the work position remote speaker and the work position vicinity speaker, and the work is in a position where it is easy for the worker who works with the front frame 12 open. The notification content that is highly relevant to the work content is weighted and notified from the speaker near the position. Further, the gaming machine 10 weights the notification contents having a low relevance to the work contents from the work position remote speaker at a position where it is difficult for the worker who works by opening the front frame 12 to hear the different notification contents. Balance the notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (1), the gaming machine 10 includes a shaft support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12. , Probability setting changing notification and RAM clear notification may be performed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12, and the notification mode is different between when the front frame 12 is closed and when the front frame 12 is opened.

For example, when the front frame is closed, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound "setting is being changed. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" from both the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound "setting is being changed. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" from the speaker on the shaft support side, and the notification sound "setting is being changed" from the speaker on the open end side. (Hereafter, loop) ”is output.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened. At this time, the gaming machine 10 makes the notification sound of the shaft support side speaker the same when the front frame is closed and when the front frame is open, and makes the notification sound of the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed and when the front frame is open. Wrong. Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs a plurality of notification sounds (probability setting changing notification sound and RAM clear notification sound) from the shaft support side speaker when the front frame is opened to ensure the notification effect of the plurality of notification sounds. On the other hand, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound (notification sound during probability setting change) having a high relevance to the work content from the open end side speaker to assist the worker's workability.

Further, as shown in FIG. 144 (2), the gaming machine 10 includes a shaft support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12. , Probability setting changing notification and RAM clear notification may be performed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12, and the notification mode is different between when the front frame 12 is closed and when the front frame 12 is opened.

For example, when the front frame is closed, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound "setting is being changed. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" from both the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs the notification sound "RAM cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" from the speaker on the shaft support side, and the notification sound "setting is being changed" from the speaker on the open end side (hereinafter, loop). ) ”Is output.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened, and the front frame 12 is opened so that the operator can easily hear the opening. The end side speaker notifies the notification content that is highly relevant to the work content. Further, the gaming machine 10 notifies the worker who works by opening the front frame 12 of the notification content having a low relevance to the work content from the shaft support side speaker located at a position where it is difficult to hear.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (1), the gaming machine 10 includes a shaft support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12. , Probability setting changing notification and RAM clear notification may be performed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12, and the notification mode is different between when the front frame 12 is closed and when the front frame 12 is opened.

For example, when the front frame is closed, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound "setting is being changed. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" from both the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound "The front frame is being opened. RAM is cleared. (Hereinafter, loop)" from the speaker on the shaft support side, and the notification sound "setting change" is output from the speaker on the open end side. It is in the middle. (Hereafter, loop) ”is output.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the notification content to the outside. Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds between the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened. At this time, the gaming machine 10 includes the notification sound related to the opening of the front frame in the notification sound of the shaft support side speaker. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the notification sound of the open end side speaker is different between when the front frame is closed and when the front frame is opened. Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs a plurality of notification sounds (a notification sound during the opening of the front frame and a RAM clear notification sound) from the speaker on the shaft support side when the front frame is opened to ensure the notification effect of the plurality of notification sounds. On the other hand, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound (notification sound during probability setting change) having a high relevance to the work content from the open end side speaker to assist the worker's workability.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (2), the gaming machine 10 includes a shaft support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12. , The notification volume may be different. For example, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound from both the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker at a preset volume when the front frame is closed. Further, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound from the shaft support side speaker at a suppressed volume suppressed from the set volume when the front frame is opened, and an emphasized volume (for example, maximum volume) larger than the set volume from the open end side speaker. Outputs a notification sound with. As a result, the gaming machine 10 assists the workability of the worker while ensuring the notification effect of the notification sound to other than the worker.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145 (3), the gaming machine 10 includes a shaft support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12. , You may use different channels. For example, the gaming machine 10 allocates a maintenance channel (maintenance channel) among a plurality of channels that can be used for sound output. The gaming machine 10 allows notification sound output from all channels from both the shaft support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed. Further, the gaming machine 10 limits the output of the notification sound from the maintenance channel on the shaft support side speaker when the front frame is open, and allows the output of the notification sound from the maintenance channel on the open end side speaker. As a result, the gaming machine 10 assists the workability of the worker while ensuring the notification effect of the notification sound to other than the worker.

The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment (including the modified example) described above has the following features on one side.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136). ), A clearing means (for example, a game control device 100, a RAM initialization switch 112), and a notification control means (for example, a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, a notification device). The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different gaming performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means executes the first video output for notifying the confirmation of the setting change and the second video output for notifying the clearing of the game information with an overlapping period, and notifies the confirmation of the setting change. The sound output of the above and the second sound output for notifying the clearing of the game information are executed by eliminating the overlapping period (see FIGS. 128 to 131).

(2) The game information in (1) includes setting information.
(3) The gaming machine 10 has information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136). ), A clearing means (for example, a game control device 100, a RAM initialization switch 112), and a notification control means (for example, a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, a notification device). The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different gaming performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means has a first video output for notifying the confirmation of the setting change, a second video output for notifying the clearing of the game information, a first sound output for notifying the confirmation of the setting change, and the game information. The second sound output for notifying the clear is executed with an overlapping period, and the overlap of the maximum volume output period is eliminated by fading at least one of the first sound output and the second sound output. Sound output is performed (see FIGS. 128, 129, 133 (4), 134 (1), (3)).

(4) The game information in (3) includes setting information.
(5) The notification control means of (3) executes sound output by fading in at least one of the first sound output and the second sound output to eliminate duplication of the maximum volume output period (5). See FIG. 133 (4)).

(6) The notification control means of (3) executes sound output by fading out at least one of the first sound output and the second sound output to eliminate duplication of the maximum volume output period (FIG. 6). 134 (1)).

(7) The gaming machine 10 has information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136). ), A clearing means (for example, a game control device 100, a RAM initialization switch 112), and a notification control means (for example, a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, a notification device). The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different gaming performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means has a first video output for notifying the confirmation of the setting change, a second video output for notifying the clearing of the game information, a first sound output for notifying the confirmation of the setting change, and the game information. When the second sound output for notifying clear is executed with an overlapping period, one of the first sound output and the second sound output is increased in comparison with the other volume. The sound output from the speaker L is prioritized before and after the timing t4 to t4b in FIG. 133 (1) and the timing t4e in FIG. 134 (3), and the sound output from the speaker L is prioritized. ) Is set to the overlapping period (priority is given to the sound output from the speaker R before and after the timing t4f), and the sound output is executed (see FIGS. 133 (4), 134 (1), (2), and (3)). ..

(8) In the notification control means of (7), the volume of one of the first sound output and the second sound output is increased as compared with the volume of the other, so that one notification is notified to the other. (For example, the sound output from the speaker L is prioritized before and after the timing t4e in FIG. 134 (3)) and the volume of the other is increased in comparison with the volume of the other to give priority to the other. The sound output is executed by setting the second priority period (priority is given to the sound output from the speaker R before and after the timing t4f in FIG. 134 (3)) in which the notification is prioritized to one notification (FIG. 134). See (3) and (4)).

(9) Even if the game machine 10 has a main body portion (for example, an outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front surface portion (for example, a front frame (main body frame) 12 or a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15). Good), a first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C). ), Setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112). , A notification control means (for example, a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, a notification device). The front portion is pivotally attached to the front side of the main body portion with one side as an axis so as to be openable and closable. The first sound output unit is provided on the shaft attachment side of the front surface portion. The second sound output unit is provided on the open end side of the front surface portion. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different gaming performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. When the notification control means performs notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding clearing of game information, the second sound output unit performs either notification regarding setting change or notification regarding clearing of game information (FIG. 128, FIG. 129, see FIGS. 143 to 145).

(10) Even if the game machine 10 has a main body portion (for example, an outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front surface portion (for example, a front frame (main body frame) 12 or a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15). Good), a first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C). ), Setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112). , A notification control means (for example, a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, a notification device). The front portion is pivotally attached to the front side of the main body portion with one side as an axis so as to be openable and closable. The first sound output unit is provided on the shaft attachment side of the front surface portion. The second sound output unit is provided on the open end side of the front surface portion. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different gaming performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. When the notification control means performs notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding clearing of game information between the first sound output unit and the second sound output unit, the first sound output unit is set as the first notification mode. The second sound output unit is set to a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (see FIGS. 128, 129, 143 to 145).

(11) The game information of (9) or (10) includes setting information.
(12) Even if the game machine 10 has a main body portion (for example, an outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front surface portion (for example, a front frame (main body frame) 12 or a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15). Good), a first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C). ), Setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112). , A notification control means (for example, a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, a notification device). The front portion is pivotally attached to the front side of the main body portion with one side as an axis so as to be openable and closable. The first sound output unit is provided on the shaft attachment side of the front surface portion. The second sound output unit is provided on the open end side of the front surface portion. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different gaming performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. When the notification control means performs notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding clearing of game information, either notification regarding setting change or notification regarding clearing of game information is performed in the second sound output unit in the open state where the front portion is open. One of them is set to the priority notification state (see FIGS. 128, 129, 143 to 145).

(13) Even if the game machine 10 has a main body portion (for example, an outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front surface portion (for example, a front frame (main body frame) 12 or a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15). Good), a first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C). ), Setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112). , A notification control means (for example, a game control device 100, an effect control device 300, a notification device). The front portion is pivotally attached to the front side of the main body portion with one side as an axis so as to be openable and closable. The first sound output unit is provided on the shaft attachment side of the front surface portion. The second sound output unit is provided on the open end side of the front surface portion. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different gaming performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. When the notification control means performs notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding clearing of game information in an open state in which the front portion is open, the first sound output unit and the second sound output unit are set to the first notification mode. Then, when the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding the clearing of the game information are performed in the closed state where the front portion is blocked, the first sound output unit and the second sound output unit are different from the first notification mode. 2 is the notification mode (see FIGS. 128, 129, 143 to 145).

(14) The gaming machine 10 includes a gaming control means (game control device 100) and an effect control means (effect control device 300). The game control means controls the game. The effect control means receives a command from the game control means and controls the effect means (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, board effect device 44, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc.). The game control means includes an information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C), a setting means (for example, a game control device 100, a setting value change switch 126, a setting key switch 127, and a probability setting value display device 136). A clearing means (for example, a game control device 100, a RAM initialization switch 112) and a notification means (CPU unit 110, output unit 130) are included. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different gaming performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification means notifies the effect control means by the first command (for example, RAM clear command) that the game information has been cleared, and the second command (for example, probability) that the game performance setting has been changed. Notify the effect control means by the setting confirmation command). The effect control means includes a first notification means, a second notification means, and a notification timing control means. The first notification means receives the first command and notifies by the effect means that the game information has been cleared. The second notifying means receives the second command and notifies by the effect means that the setting of the game performance has been changed. When the notification timing control means receives the first command, the notification timing control means changes the execution timing of the first notification means according to whether or not the second command is received (see FIGS. 137 to 139).

(15) The gaming machine 10 includes a gaming control means (game control device 100) and an effect control means (effect control device 300). The game control means controls the game. The effect control means receives a command from the game control means and controls the effect means (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, board effect device 44, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc.). The game control means includes an information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM111C), a setting means (for example, a game control device 100, a setting value change switch 126, a setting key switch 127, and a probability setting value display device 136). A clearing means (for example, a game control device 100, a RAM initialization switch 112) and a notification means (CPU unit 110, output unit 130) are included. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power is cut off. The setting means can be changed to one of two or more different gaming performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification means notifies the effect control means by the first command (for example, RAM clear command) that the game information has been cleared, and the second command (for example, probability) that the game performance setting is being changed. Notify the effect control means by the setting confirmation command). The effect control means includes a first notification means, a second notification means, and a notification timing control means. The first notification means receives the first command and notifies by the effect means that the game information has been cleared. The second notifying means receives the second command and notifies by the effect means that the setting of the game performance is being changed. When the notification timing control means receives the first command, the notification timing control means changes the execution timing of the first notification means according to whether or not the second command is received (see FIGS. 137 to 139).

(16) The notification timing control means of (14) or (15) changes the execution start time of the first notification means (see FIGS. 137 (1) and (3)).
(17) The notification timing control means of (14) or (15) changes the execution period of the first notification means (see FIGS. 137 (1), (2), and (3)).

The above processing function can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing function is realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. The recording medium that can be read by a computer includes a magnetic storage device, an optical disk, a photomagnetic recording medium, a semiconductor memory, and the like. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk device (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape, and the like. Optical discs include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. The magneto-optical recording medium includes MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

When a program is distributed, for example, a portable recording medium such as a DVD or a CD-ROM in which the program is recorded is sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes the processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute the processing according to the program. Further, the computer can sequentially execute the processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from the server computer connected via the network.

Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game balls of the above, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

It should also be considered that the disclosed embodiments are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 41 Display device 100 Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (1)

With the main body
A front part that can be opened and closed on the front side of the main body with one side as the axis, and a front part
A first sound output unit provided on the shaft attachment side of the front surface portion, and
A second sound output unit provided on the open end side of the front surface portion, and
A game control means that controls the game,
An effect control means that receives a command from the game control means and controls the effect,
Equipped with
The game control means is
Information storage means that can store and retain game information before the power is turned off,
Setting means that can set the game performance,
Initialization means for initializing the game information held at the time of setting the game performance, and
A display means capable of selectively displaying the game performance information related to the game performance and the derivation performance information derived based on the number of acquired game media.
Including
The information storage means is
The first work area and the first stack area related to the information related to the game control including the game performance information, and the second work area and the second stack area related to the derivation performance information are included.
The game control means is
When the power is turned on, the validity determination of the game information stored and held in the information storage means is excluded from the determination of the first stack area, the second work area, and the second stack area. Performed by a checksum targeting the area,
If the result of the validity determination is not valid, and if the condition for setting the game performance in a configurable state is not satisfied, the game progress is stopped without initializing the information storage means. death,
When the condition for setting the configurable state is satisfied, the setting is set and the first work area and the first stack area are targeted, and the second work area and the second stack area are set. Initialize the information storage means to be excluded,
The effect control means is
When the notification of the configurable state and the notification regarding the initialization of the game information are performed by sound output , the second sound output unit is in the configurable state when the front surface portion is open. A notification control means for setting a priority notification state in which either the notification of the fact or the notification related to the initialization of the game information is prioritized is included.
Pachinko machine.

Images